Minolta Fax Machine FAX2900 User Manual

KONICA MINOLTA FAX2900/FAX3900  
User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Operating Environment.............................................................. 2-4  
Proper Use................................................................................. 2-4  
Transporting the Machine .......................................................... 2-5  
Care of Machine Supplies.......................................................... 2-5  
2.3  
Legal Restrictions on Copying.................................................... 2-6  
3
Before Making Copies or Faxing  
3.1  
3.2  
3.3  
Available Features........................................................................ 3-2  
Components and Their Functions .............................................. 3-3  
Parts Names and Their Functions .............................................. 3-4  
Main Unit.................................................................................... 3-4  
Inside the Machine..................................................................... 3-5  
Adjusting the Angle of the Copy Tray ........................................ 3-6  
3.4  
3.5  
Control Panel ................................................................................ 3-8  
Names of Control Panel Parts and Their Functions................... 3-8  
Display Indications................................................................... 3-12  
Turning the Machine On/Off Initial Mode ................................. 3-14  
Turning the Machine On/Off..................................................... 3-14  
To turn on the machine:........................................................... 3-14  
To turn off the machine:........................................................... 3-14  
When the Machine is Turned On ............................................. 3-14  
Default Settings........................................................................ 3-15  
3.6  
Useful Functions ........................................................................ 3-16  
Panel Resetting........................................................................ 3-16  
Auto Panel Reset..................................................................... 3-16  
Energy Save Mode .................................................................. 3-16  
Auto Print Start......................................................................... 3-17  
Auto Tray Switching ................................................................ 3-17  
3.7  
3.8  
Entering Text............................................................................... 3-18  
Changing Input Mode............................................................... 3-18  
Inputting Example .................................................................... 3-19  
Copy Paper.................................................................................. 3-21  
Paper Specifications ................................................................ 3-21  
Precautions for Loading Paper ................................................ 3-21  
Unsuitable Paper ..................................................................... 3-22  
Loading Paper.......................................................................... 3-23  
Loading Paper into Tray1......................................................... 3-25  
Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray........................................ 3-27  
Loading Paper into Tray2 (option) ........................................... 3-28  
3.9  
Loading Originals....................................................................... 3-29  
Loading Originals in the Auto Document Feeder ..................... 3-29  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Specific Types of Originals.......................................................3-29  
Precautions for Loading Paper Into the Auto Document  
Feeder ......................................................................................3-29  
Loading Originals into the Auto Document Feeder...................3-30  
3.10 Checking the Machine Status ....................................................3-31  
Checking the “TOTAL PAGE” Counts ......................................3-32  
Checking the “TX/RX RESULT” ...............................................3-33  
To output a report/list................................................................3-34  
TX Result Report......................................................................3-35  
RX Result Report......................................................................3-35  
Activity Report ..........................................................................3-35  
Memory Data List .....................................................................3-35  
Memory Image Print .................................................................3-36  
One-Touch List.........................................................................3-36  
Speed Dial List .........................................................................3-36  
Key Setting List.........................................................................3-36  
Machine Status.........................................................................3-36  
Configuration Page...................................................................3-36  
Relay Box List (Available only with FAX3900)..........................3-36  
3.11 Print Area.....................................................................................3-37  
4
Making Copies  
4.1  
4.2  
Making a Basic Copy ....................................................................4-2  
Selecting the Paper.......................................................................4-4  
Manual Paper Selection .............................................................4-4  
Selecting Manually Fed Paper....................................................4-4  
Manually Selecting the Paper Size.............................................4-4  
Specifying the Size and Type on the Manual Bypass Tray ........4-5  
4.3  
4.4  
Specifying the Zoom Ratio...........................................................4-9  
Zoom Ratio Settings...................................................................4-9  
Setting the Zoom Ratio.............................................................4-10  
Adjusting the Image Density......................................................4-11  
Image Density Setting ..............................................................4-11  
Setting the Image Density ........................................................4-11  
4.5  
4.6  
Making 2in1 Copies (Available only with FAX3900).................4-13  
Specifying Settings for 2in1 Copies..........................................4-13  
Finishing Copies .........................................................................4-14  
Specifying Sorting.....................................................................4-15  
5
Faxing  
5.1  
Dialing ............................................................................................5-2  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
To fax by entering the fax number directly using the 10-Key  
Pad............................................................................................. 5-2  
To fax using one-touch dialing................................................... 5-3  
To fax using speed dialing ......................................................... 5-5  
To fax using group dialing.......................................................... 5-6  
To fax using chain dialing .......................................................... 5-7  
To fax using program dialing (Available only with FAX3900)..... 5-8  
To fax using the phone book...................................................... 5-9  
To search the phone book ....................................................... 5-10  
To redial the last recipient called ............................................. 5-11  
5.2  
5.3  
5.4  
Transmission Settings............................................................... 5-12  
Adjusting the Fax Resolution ................................................... 5-12  
To specify the resolution.......................................................... 5-12  
Basic Faxing ............................................................................... 5-13  
To fax using the Auto Document Feeder ................................. 5-13  
If the Memory Becomes Full While Scanning Fax Documents 5-14  
Checking Transmission Results............................................... 5-15  
To check the transmission result ............................................. 5-15  
6
Fax Transmission/Reception Methods  
6.1  
Transmission Methods ................................................................ 6-2  
Memory Transmission................................................................ 6-2  
To specify Memory TX ............................................................... 6-2  
Direct Transmission ................................................................... 6-3  
Manual Transmission................................................................. 6-4  
To send a fax manually.............................................................. 6-5  
Batch Transmission ................................................................... 6-6  
To fax using batch transmission ................................................ 6-6  
Broadcast Transmission ............................................................ 6-7  
To fax using broadcast transmission ......................................... 6-7  
Timer Transmission ................................................................. 6-10  
To fax using timer transmission ............................................... 6-11  
Mailbox Transmission .............................................................. 6-12  
To fax using mailbox transmission........................................... 6-12  
Relay Initiation Transmission................................................... 6-14  
To fax using relay initiation transmission ................................. 6-14  
Relay Broadcast Transmission (Available only with FAX3900)6-16  
Polling Transmission................................................................ 6-17  
To set up polling transmission ................................................. 6-17  
To delete a document from the polling transmission setup...... 6-19  
Canceling (Deleting) a Document Queued in the Memory for  
Transmission............................................................................ 6-20  
To cancel a queued document................................................. 6-20  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
6.2  
Reception Methods.....................................................................6-22  
Manual Reception.....................................................................6-22  
To receive a fax manually.........................................................6-22  
Memory Reception ...................................................................6-22  
Mailbox Reception....................................................................6-23  
To retrieve a document from a mailbox....................................6-23  
Polling Reception......................................................................6-24  
To receive a fax using polling reception ...................................6-24  
6.3  
Using F codes..............................................................................6-26  
Using Mailboxes .......................................................................6-27  
Specifying F codes ...................................................................6-28  
When sending faxes.................................................................6-28  
Programming F codes ..............................................................6-28  
7
Using the Utility Mode  
7.1  
7.2  
Utility Mode....................................................................................7-2  
Specifying the Machine Settings.................................................7-3  
Selecting the “MACHINE SETTING” menu ................................7-4  
Specifying the Setting for “AUTO PANEL RESET” ....................7-5  
Specifying the Setting for “ENERGY SAVE MODE”...................7-6  
Specifying the Setting for “DENSITY ”........................................7-7  
Specifying the Setting for “PRINT DENSITY”.............................7-8  
Specifying the Setting for “LCD CONTRAST” ............................7-9  
Specifying the Setting for “BUZZER VOLUME”........................7-10  
Specifying the Setting for “INITIAL MODE” ..............................7-11  
7.3  
7.4  
7.5  
Setting Up the Paper Sources....................................................7-12  
Selecting the “PAPER SOURCE SETUP” menu......................7-12  
Specifying the Setting for “TRAY1 PAPER” .............................7-13  
Specifying the Setting for “TRAY SETTING............................7-14  
Specifying Administrative Settings (“ADMIN. MANAGEMENT”  
menu) ...........................................................................................7-15  
To select the “ADMIN. MANAGEMENT” menu ........................7-16  
Specifying the Setting for “REMOTE MONITOR.....................7-17  
Specifying Copy Settings...........................................................7-18  
Selecting the “COPY SETTING” menu.....................................7-19  
Specifying the Setting for “PAPER PRIORITY........................7-20  
Specifying the Setting for “DENSITY PRIORITY”.....................7-21  
Specifying the Setting for “DENSITY LEVEL (A)”.....................7-22  
Specifying the Setting for “DENSITY LEVEL (M)....................7-23  
Specifying the Setting for “OUTPUT PRIORITY” .....................7-24  
7.6  
Setting Up the Fax Registration.................................................7-25  
Selecting the “FAX REGISTRATION” menu ............................7-26  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Setting Up One-Touch Dialing (“ONE-TOUCH DIAL” function)7-27  
To program a one-touch dial key ............................................. 7-27  
To change/delete a programmed one-touch dial key............... 7-29  
Specifying the Setting for “SPEED DIAL” ................................ 7-31  
To program a speed dial number............................................. 7-31  
To change/delete a programmed speed dial number .............. 7-33  
Specifying the Setting for “GROUP DIAL” ............................... 7-35  
To program a group of fax numbers ........................................ 7-35  
To change/delete a programmed group of fax numbers.......... 7-36  
Specifying the Setting for “PROGRAM DIAL” (Available only with  
FAX3900)................................................................................. 7-38  
To set program dialing ............................................................. 7-38  
To change/delete a programmed broadcast transmission....... 7-39  
To change/delete a programmed timer transmission............... 7-40  
To change/delete a programmed mailbox transmission .......... 7-41  
To change/delete a programmed polling reception.................. 7-43  
To change/delete a programmed relay initiation transmission. 7-44  
Specifying the Setting for “BATCH TX.................................... 7-46  
To set batch transmitting.......................................................... 7-46  
To change the batch transmission setting ............................... 7-47  
To delete the batch transmission setting ................................. 7-49  
Specifying the Setting for “MAILBOX”...................................... 7-50  
To register a mailbox ............................................................... 7-50  
To delete a mailbox.................................................................. 7-51  
Specifying the Setting for “ RELAY BOX” (Available only with  
FAX3900)................................................................................. 7-53  
To register a Relay Box ........................................................... 7-53  
To delete a Relay Box.............................................................. 7-54  
7.7  
7.8  
Setting Up the Transmission..................................................... 7-55  
Selecting the “TX OPERATION” menu.................................... 7-55  
Specifying the Setting for “SCAN CONTRAST....................... 7-56  
Specifying the Setting for “RESOLUTION” .............................. 7-56  
Specifying Setting for “DEFAULT TX”...................................... 7-57  
Specifying the Setting for “HEADER”....................................... 7-58  
Setting Up the Reception........................................................... 7-59  
Selecting the “RX OPERATION” menu.................................... 7-60  
Specifying the Setting for “MEMORY RX MODE”.................... 7-61  
To cancel memory reception.................................................... 7-63  
Specifying the Setting for “NO.of RINGS................................ 7-64  
Specifying the Setting for “REDUCTION RX” .......................... 7-64  
Specifying the Setting for “RX PRINT..................................... 7-65  
Specifying the Setting for “RX MODE..................................... 7-65  
Specifying the Setting for “FORWARD................................... 7-66  
Specifying the Setting for “FOOTER”....................................... 7-67  
Specifying the Setting for “SELECT TRAY............................. 7-67  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
7.9  
Specifying the Setting for “CLOSED NETWORK....................7-68  
Setting Up the Communication..................................................7-69  
Specifying the Setting for “TONE/PULSE” ...............................7-69  
To specify the telephone dialing system...................................7-69  
Specifying the Setting for “LINE MONITOR” ............................7-70  
Specifying the Setting for “PSTN/PBX” ....................................7-71  
To specify the telephone wiring system....................................7-71  
7.10 Setting Up the Report Output ....................................................7-72  
Selecting the “REPORTING” menu..........................................7-72  
Specifying the Setting for “ACTIVITY REPORT......................7-73  
Specifying the Setting for “RESERV.REPORT” .......................7-73  
Specifying the Setting for “TX RESULT REPORT” ..................7-74  
Specifying the Setting for “RX RESULT REPORT..................7-74  
7.11 Specifying Initial User Data........................................................7-75  
Selecting the “INITIAL USER DATA” menu..............................7-75  
Specifying the Setting for “DATE&TIME”..................................7-76  
Specifying the Setting for “USER FAX NO..............................7-77  
Specifying the Setting for “USER NAME”.................................7-78  
8
When a Message Appears  
8.1  
When the Message “PAPER EMPTY” Appears..........................8-2  
Loading Paper into Tray1 ...........................................................8-3  
Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray ..........................................8-3  
Loading Paper into Tray2 (option)..............................................8-4  
8.2  
8.3  
8.4  
8.5  
8.6  
When the Message “TONER EMPTY” Appears..........................8-5  
Replacing the Toner Cartridge ...................................................8-6  
When the Message “PAPER MISFEED” Appears ....................8-10  
Clearing a Paper Misfeed in the Paper Trays...........................8-10  
When the Message “PAPER JAM” Appears.............................8-13  
Clearing a Paper Misfeed in the Machine.................................8-13  
When the Message “ORIGINAL DOC. JAM” Appears..............8-16  
Clearing a paper misfeed in Auto Document Feeder ...............8-16  
When the Message “PAPER SIZE ERROR” Appears ..............8-18  
For Tray1..................................................................................8-18  
For the Bypass Tray .................................................................8-20  
8.7  
8.8  
8.9  
When the Message “MACHINE TROUBLE” Appears...............8-21  
What Does Each Message Mean? .............................................8-22  
When Incorrect Copies Are Produced ......................................8-26  
8.10 The machine is not functioning as designed ...........................8-28  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
8.11 When Faxing Is Not Performed Correctly ................................ 8-29  
Faxes Cannot Be Sent............................................................. 8-29  
Faxes Cannot Be Received ..................................................... 8-30  
Calls Cannot Be Sent............................................................... 8-31  
9
Internet Fax & Network Scan  
9.1  
Overview........................................................................................ 9-2  
Logging in to Administrator Mode ............................................ 9-13  
9.2  
Getting Ready ............................................................................. 9-14  
Connecting the LAN Cable ...................................................... 9-14  
Network Settings...................................................................... 9-21  
Setting the IP Address ............................................................. 9-22  
Specifying the Subnet Mask .................................................... 9-23  
Specifying the (Default) Gateway ............................................ 9-23  
Specifying the DNS Configuration ........................................... 9-24  
Specifying the E-mail Settings (“E-MAIL SETTING 1” Menu).. 9-25  
Registering the Sender’s Name............................................... 9-25  
Registering the E-mail Address of the Sender......................... 9-26  
Specifying the SMTP Server Address...................................... 9-26  
Specifying the SMTP Port Number (“SMTP PORT NO.”  
Function).................................................................................. 9-27  
Specifying the Timeout Period for the SMTP Server (“SMTP  
TIMEOUT” Function)................................................................ 9-27  
Specifying Whether or Not To Insert a Text Description  
(“TEXT INSERT” Function)...................................................... 9-27  
Specifying the Default Subject Line ......................................... 9-28  
Specifying Other E-mail Settings (“E-MAIL SETTING 2”  
Menu)....................................................................................... 9-28  
Specifying the POP3 Server Address...................................... 9-29  
Specifying the POP3 Port Number (“POP3 PORT NO.”  
Function).................................................................................. 9-29  
Specifying the Timeout Period for the POP3 Server (“POP3  
TIMEOUT” Function)................................................................ 9-30  
Specifying the POP3 Account Name ....................................... 9-30  
Specifying the POP3 Password............................................... 9-30  
Setting Up Auto Reception....................................................... 9-31  
Specifying the Address for Result Notifications ....................... 9-32  
Specifying Whether or Not To Print Header Information  
(“HEADER PRINT” Function)................................................... 9-32  
“Network” tab ........................................................................... 9-33  
TCP/IP Configuration............................................................... 9-33  
SMTP & POP3 Configuration................................................... 9-34  
FTP & DNS Configuration........................................................ 9-36  
“Fax” Tab ................................................................................. 9-37  
Fax Configuration..................................................................... 9-37  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
“Scan” Tab................................................................................9-38  
File Destination Setting.............................................................9-38  
Specifying the Settings for a One-Touch Dial Key ...................9-42  
Specifying the Settings for a Speed Dial Number ....................9-43  
Specifying the Settings for a Group Dial Key ...........................9-44  
Specifying Settings for One-Touch Dialing...............................9-46  
Adding a New One-Touch Dial Setting.....................................9-47  
Specifying the Settings for Speed Dialing ................................9-48  
Adding a New Speed Dial Setting ............................................9-49  
Specifying the Settings for Group Dialing.................................9-50  
Adding a New Group Dial Setting.............................................9-50  
Specifying the Settings for Speed Dialing (FTP Server)...........9-52  
Adding a New Speed Dial (FTP Server) Setting.......................9-53  
Downloading and Uploading the Destination List.....................9-55  
9.3  
Using Scan to E-mail Operations ..............................................9-56  
Specifying the Resolution.........................................................9-60  
Specifying the Data Format......................................................9-61  
Specifying the Encoding Method..............................................9-61  
9.4  
9.5  
Using Scan to Server (FTP) Operations....................................9-67  
Using Internet Faxing Operations .............................................9-71  
Checking E-mail Manually........................................................9-79  
9.6  
Checking the Transmission/Reception Results.......................9-83  
10 Miscellaneous  
10.1 Specifications..............................................................................10-2  
Scan to E-mail / Scan to Server ............................................... 10-3  
Internet Fax ............................................................................ 10-3  
Auto Document Feeder ............................................................10-4  
Paper Feed Cassette (option) ..................................................10-4  
10.2 Function Menu Commands........................................................10-5  
Function Menu Commands ......................................................10-5  
10.3 Care of the Machine....................................................................10-6  
Cleaning ...................................................................................10-6  
Housing Cover..........................................................................10-6  
Control Panel............................................................................10-6  
10.4 Glossary.......................................................................................10-7  
Terms and Definitions...............................................................10-7  
10.5 Paper Size and Zoom Ratio Tables ...........................................10-8  
Paper Sizes ..............................................................................10-8  
Zoom Ratios .............................................................................10-9  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Introduction  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.1 We Want You to Be a Satisfied Customer  
1
1.1  
We Want You to Be a Satisfied Customer  
Thank you for choosing the FAX2900/3900.  
This User Manual describes the functions, operating procedures, precautions, and  
basic troubleshooting for the FAX2900/3900.  
Before using this machine, be sure to read the User Manual thoroughly in order to  
ensure that you use the machine efficiently. After you have gone through the  
manual, store it in the holder and keep it handy at all times.  
Note that some of the illustrations of the machine used in the User Manual may be  
different from what you actually see on your machine.  
For U.S.A. Users  
FCC Part 15-Radio Frequency Devices  
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are  
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the  
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,  
uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications.  
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful  
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his  
own expense.  
WARNING: The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and  
any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to  
FCC control. Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting  
the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations.  
This device must be used with shielded interface cables. The use of non-shielded  
cable is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited  
under FCC rules.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.1 We Want You to Be a Satisfied Customer  
1
For Canada Users  
Interference-Causing Equipment Standard (ICES-003 Issue 4)  
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du  
Canada.  
For users in countries subject to Class B regulations  
This device must be used with shielded interface cables. The use of non-shielded  
cable is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited  
under CISPR 22 rules and local rules.  
For users in countries not subject to Class B regulations  
WARNING  
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio  
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.  
This device must be used with shielded interface cables. The use of non-shielded  
cable is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited  
under CISPR 22 rules and local rules.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 Safety Information  
1
1.2  
Safety Information  
This section contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this  
machine. To achieve optimum utility of this device, all operators should carefully  
read and follow the instructions in this manual.  
Please read the following section before connecting the machine to the supply. It  
contains important information related to user safety and preventing equipment  
problems.  
G
G
Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.  
Make sure you observe all of the precautions appear in each section of this  
manual.  
Note: Some parts of the contents of this section may not correspond with  
the purchased product.  
Warning and Precaution Symbols  
The following indicators are used on the warning labels or in this manual to  
categorize the level of safety warnings.  
Ignoring this warning could cause serious injury or even death.  
WARNING  
Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to property.  
CAUTION  
Meaning of Symbols  
A triangle indicates a danger against which you should take precaution.  
This symbol warns against cause burns.  
A diagonal line indicates a prohibited course of action.  
This symbol warns against dismantling the device.  
A solid circle indicates an imperative course of action.  
This symbol indicates you must unplug the device.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 Safety Information  
1
Disassemble and modification  
WARNING  
• Do not attempt to remove the covers and panels  
which have been fixed to the product. Some products  
have a high-voltage part or a laser beam source  
inside that could cause an electrical shock or  
blindness.  
• Do not modify this product, as a fire, electrical shock,  
or breakdown could result. If the product employs a  
laser, the laser beam source could cause blindness.  
Power cord  
WARNING  
• Use only the power cord supplied in the package. If a  
power cord is not supplied, only use the power cord  
and plug that is specified in POWER CORD  
INSTRUCTION. Failure to use this cord could result in  
a fire or electrical shock.  
• Use the power cord supplied in the package only for  
this machine and NEVER use it for any other product.  
Failure to observe this precaution could result in a fire  
or electrical shock.  
• Do not scratch, abrade, place a heavy object on, heat,  
twist, bend, pull on, or damage the power cord. Use of  
a damaged power cord (exposed core wire, broken  
wire, etc.) could result in a fire or breakdown.  
Should any of these conditions be found, immediately  
turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord  
from the power outlet, and then call your authorized  
service representative.  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 Safety Information  
1
Power source  
WARNING  
• Use only the specified power source voltage. Failure  
to do that could result in a fire or electrical shock.  
• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having the  
same configuration as the plug. Use of an adapter  
leads to the product connecting to inadequate power  
supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and  
may result in fire or shock. If proper wall outlet is not  
available, the customer shall ask qualified electrician  
for the installation.  
• Do not use a multiple outlet adapter nor an extension  
cord in principle. Use of an adapter or an extension  
cord could cause a fire or electrical shock.  
Contact your authorized service representative if an  
extension cord is required.  
• Consult your authorized service representative before  
connecting other equipment on the same wall outlet.  
Overload could result in a fire.  
CAUTION  
• The outlet must be near the equipment and easily  
accessible. Otherwise you can not pull out the power  
plug when an emergency occurs.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 Safety Information  
1
Power plug  
WARNING  
• Do not unplug and plug in the power cord with a wet  
hand, as an electrical shock could result.  
• Plug the power cord all the way into the power outlet.  
Failure to do this could result in a fire or electrical  
shock.  
CAUTION  
• Do not tug the power cord when unplugging. Pulling  
on the power cord could damage the cord, resulting in  
a fire or electrical shock.  
• Remove the power plug from the outlet more than one  
time a year and clean the area between the plug  
terminals. Dust that accumulates between the plug  
terminals may cause a fire.  
Grounding  
WARNING  
• Connect the power cord to an electrical outlet that is  
equipped with a grounding terminal.  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 Safety Information  
1
Installation  
WARNING  
• Do not place a flower vase or other container that  
contains water, or metal clips or other small metallic  
objects on this product. Spilled water or metallic  
objects dropped inside the product could result in a  
fire, electrical shock, or breakdown.  
Should a piece of metal, water, or any other similar  
foreign matter get inside the product, immediately turn  
OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from  
the power outlet, and then call your authorized service  
representative.  
CAUTION  
• After installing this product, mount it on a secure  
base. If the unit moves or falls, it may cause personal  
injury.  
• Do not place the product in a dusty place, or a site  
exposed to soot or steam, near a kitchen table, bath,  
or a humidifier. A fire, electrical shock, or breakdown  
could result.  
• Do not place this product on an unstable or tilted  
bench, or in a location subject to a lot of vibration and  
shock. It could drop or fall, causing personal injury or  
mechanical breakdown.  
• Do not let any object plug the ventilation holes of this  
product. Heat could accumulate inside the product,  
resulting in a fire or malfunction.  
• Do not use flammable sprays, liquids, or gases near  
this product, as a fire could result.  
Ventilation  
CAUTION  
• Always use this product in a well ventilated location.  
Operating the product in a poorly ventilated room for  
an extended period of time could injure your health.  
Ventilate the room at regular intervals.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 Safety Information  
1
Actions in response to troubles  
WARNING  
• Do not keep using this product, if this product  
becomes inordinately hot or emits smoke, or unusual  
odor or noise. Immediately turn OFF the power  
switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet,  
and then call your authorized service representative.  
If you keep on using it as is, a fire or electrical shock  
could result.  
• Do not keep using this product, if this product has  
been dropped or its cover damaged. Immediately turn  
OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from  
the power outlet, and then call your authorized service  
representative. If you keep on using it as is, a fire or  
electrical shock could result.  
CAUTION  
• The inside of this product has areas subject to high  
temperature, which may cause burns.  
When checking the inside of the unit for malfunctions  
such as a paper misfeed, do not touch the locations  
(around the fusing unit, etc.) which are indicated by a  
“Caution HOT” caution label.  
Consumables  
WARNING  
• Do not throw the toner cartridge or toner into an open  
flame. The hot toner may scatter and cause burns or  
other damage.  
CAUTION  
• Do not leave a toner unit or drum unit in a place within  
easy reach of children. Licking or ingesting any of  
these things could injure your health.  
• Do not store toner units and PC drum units near a  
floppy disk or watch that are susceptible to  
magnetism. They could cause these products to  
malfunction.  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 Safety Information  
1
When moving the machine  
CAUTION  
• Whenever moving this product, be sure to disconnect  
the power cord and other cables. Failure to do this  
could damage the cord or cable, resulting in a fire,  
electrical shock, or breakdown.  
• When moving this product, always hold it by the  
locations specified in the User manual or other  
documents. If the unit falls it may cause severe  
personal injury. The product may also be damaged or  
malfunction.  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 Safety Information  
1
47 CFR - Telecommunication Devices  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements  
adopted by the ACTA (Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments).  
On the rear side of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information,  
a product identifier in the format US:E8OFA03BFAX2900. If requested, this number  
must be provided to the telephone company.  
This equipment uses THE FOLLOWING USOC JACKS: RJ11C.  
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a  
telephone line.  
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in  
response to an incoming call.  
It most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be a  
certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by  
the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after  
July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the  
format US:E8OFA03BFAX2900.  
The digits represented by 0.3B are the REN without a decimal point (e.g.,03 is a  
REN of 0.3).  
For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.  
If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the Telephone  
Company may discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, they will notify you  
in advance. But if advance notice isn’t practical, you will be notified as soon as  
possible. You will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.  
Your telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment,  
operations, or procedures that could affect the proper operation of your equipment.  
If they do, you will be given advance notice so as to give you an opportunity to  
maintain uninterrupted service.  
If you experience trouble with this equipment, please contact:  
Konica Minolta Business Solution U.S.A.,Inc.  
100 Williams Drive Ramsey.  
New Jersey 07446  
U.S.A  
The telephone company may ask you to disconnect this equipment from the  
network until the problem has been corrected or you are sure that the equipment is  
not malfunctioning.  
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone  
company. Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs. (Contact your state  
public utility commission or corporation commission for information.)  
Customer Information For Privately Owned Coin Phones  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 Safety Information  
1
To comply with state tariffs, the telephone company must be given notification prior  
to connection.  
In some states, prior approval of connection must be obtained from the state Public  
Utility Commission, Public Service Commission or state Corporation Commission.  
Warning For Setting Of Header And Footer  
TheTelephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person  
to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone  
fax machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom  
each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it  
is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual  
sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such  
business, other entity, or individual.  
In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the  
following steps. (Refer to Chapter 7, page 7-58 and page 7-67.)  
IC CS-03-Telecommunication Devices  
The following note shall be conspicuously placed in the user manual: The team “IC:”  
before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada  
technical specifications were met.  
NOTICE:  
This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment  
Technical Specifications.  
This is confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the  
registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a  
Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications  
were met. It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment.  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be  
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The  
equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In  
some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a single line individual  
service may be extended by means of certified connector assembly (telephone  
extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above  
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.  
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian  
maintenance facility designed by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by  
the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the  
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the  
equipment.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections  
of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 Safety Information  
1
present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in  
rural areas.  
CAUTION:  
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact  
the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.  
NOTICE:  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this terminal equipment is as follows.  
The REN assigned to each terminal equipment provides an identification of the  
maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface.  
The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject  
only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the  
devices does not exceed five.  
REN=0.2  
Laser Safety  
This is a digital machine which operates using a laser. There is no possibility of  
danger from the laser provided the machine is operated according to the  
instructions in this manual.  
Since radiation emitted by the laser is completely confined within a protective  
housing, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user  
operation.  
This machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product: This means the machine does  
not produce hazardous laser radiation.  
Internal Laser Radiation  
Maximum Average Radiation Power: 36.903 µW at the laser aperture of the print  
head unit.  
Wavelength: 770-800 nm  
This product employs a Class 3b laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam.  
The laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head  
unit.  
The print head unit is NOT A FIELD-SERVICEABLE ITEM.  
Therefore, the print head unit should not be opened under any circumstances.  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 Safety Information  
1
Print Head  
Laser Aperture of the Print Head Unit  
There is a laser aperture at the location shown above, which must NEVER be  
viewed directly by the user.  
CDRH Regulation  
This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance  
Standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is  
mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the  
Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug  
Administration of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This  
means that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation.  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 Safety Information  
1
The label shown on page 1-17 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and  
must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.  
CAUTION  
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those  
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 15 mW and  
the wavelength is 770-800 nm.  
For European Users  
CAUTION  
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those  
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 15 mW and  
the wavelength is 770-800 nm.  
For Denmark Users  
ADVARSEL  
Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion.  
Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825  
sikkerheds kravene.  
Dansk: Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens højeste styrke er 15 mW og  
bølgelængden er 770-800 nm.  
For Finland, Sweden Users  
LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITE  
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT  
VAROITUS!  
Laitteen Käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa  
altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.  
Tämä on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin sunrin teho on 15 mW ja aallonpituus on 770-  
800 nm.  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 Safety Information  
1
VARNING!  
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning specificerats,  
kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för  
laserklass 1.  
Det här är en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten för laserdioden är 15 mW och  
våglängden är 770-800 nm.  
VARO!  
Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättömälle  
lasersäteilylle. Älä katso säteeseen.  
VARNING!  
Osynlig laserstrålning när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad.  
Betrakta ej strålen.  
1-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 Safety Information  
For Norway Users  
ADVERSEL  
1
Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisning,  
kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstråling som overskrider grensen for laser  
klass 1.  
Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 15 mW og bølgelengde  
er 770-800 nm.  
Laser Safety Label  
A laser safety label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2 Safety Information  
1
Ozone Release  
CAUTION  
Locate the Machine in a Well-Ventilated Room  
§
A negligible amount of ozone is generated during normal operation of this  
machine. An unpleasant odor may, however, be created in poorly ventilated  
rooms during extensive machine operations. For a comfortable, healthy, and  
safe operating environment, it is recommended that the room be well ventilated.  
REMARQUE  
= Placer l’appareil dans une pièce largement ventilée =  
Une quantité d’ozone négligable est dégagée pendant le fonctionnement de  
l’appareil quand celui-ci est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur  
désagréable peut être ressentie dans les pièces dont l’aération est insuffisante et  
lorsque une utilisation prolongée de l’appareil est effectuée. Pour avoir la  
certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de  
confort, santé et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce où se trouve  
l’appareil.  
Acoustic Noise  
For European Users  
Machine Noise Regulation 3 GSGV, 18.01.1991 : The sound pressure level at the  
operator position according to EN 27779 is equal to or less than 70dB(A).  
Notice for Ni-MH Batteries  
Ni-MH (Nickel Metal Hydride) Batteries are installed inside machine as back up  
memory batteries. Please dispose according to local, state and federal regulations.  
1-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.3 Energy Star®  
1
1.3  
Energy Star®  
®
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined that this machine meets the  
®
ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency.  
®
What is an ENERGY STAR Product?  
®
An ENERGY STAR product has a special feature that allows it to automatically  
®
switch to a “low-power mode” after a period of inactivity. An ENERGY STAR  
product uses energy more efficiently, saves you money on utility bills and helps  
protect the environment.  
1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.4 Explanation of Manual Conventions  
1
1.4  
Explanation of Manual Conventions  
The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below.  
WARNING  
Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in fatal  
or critical injuries.  
§
Observe all warnings in order to ensure safe use of the machine.  
CAUTION  
Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in  
serious injuries or property damage.  
§
Observe all cautions in order to ensure safe use of the machine.  
Note*  
(*May also appear as “Important” or “Tip”)  
Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to ensure  
safe use of the machine.  
1 The number 1 as formatted here indicates the  
first step of a sequence of actions.  
2 Subsequent numbers as formatted here  
indicate subsequent steps of a sequence of  
actions.  
An illustration inserted here shows  
what operations must be performed.  
Text formatted in this style provides  
additional assistance.  
?
§
Text formatted in this style describes the  
action that will ensure the desired results are achieved.  
[Copy] key  
The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above.  
1-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.5 Explanation of Basic Concepts and Symbols  
1
1.5  
Explanation of Basic Concepts and Symbols  
The use of words and symbols in this manual are explained below.  
Paper Feeding  
During printing, paper is supplied from the front side of the machine and fed into the  
Copy Tray on top with the printed surface of the page facing down. The paper feed  
direction is shown by the arrows in the diagram below.  
1-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.5 Explanation of Basic Concepts and Symbols  
1
“Width” and “Length”  
Whenever paper dimensions are mentioned in  
this manual, the first value always refers to the  
width of the paper (shown as “A” in the  
illustration) and the second to the length (shown  
as “B”).  
A: Width  
B: Length  
Paper Orientation  
Lengthwise (  
)
If the width (A) of the paper is shorter than the  
length (B), the paper has a vertical or portrait  
orientation, indicated by either “L” or  
.
Crosswise (  
)
If the width (A) of the paper is longer than the  
length (B), the paper has a horizontal or  
landscape orientation, indicated by either “C” or  
.
1-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Precautions  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.1 Installation Precautions  
2
Observe the following precautions to maintain the machine in its best possible  
condition.  
2.1  
Installation Precautions  
Installation Site  
To ensure utmost safety and prevent possible malfunctions, install the machine in  
a location that meets the following requirements:  
- A location away from curtains, etc. that may catch fire and burn easily  
- A location that is not exposed to water or other liquids  
- A location free from direct sunlight  
- A location out of the direct airflow of an air conditioner or heater, and not  
exposed to extremely high or low temperatures  
- A well-ventilated location  
- A location that is not exposed to high humidity  
- A location that is not extremely dusty  
- A location not subjected to undue vibrations  
- A stable and level location  
- A location where ammonia or other organic gases are not generated  
- A location that does not put the operator in the direct airflow of exhaust from the  
machine  
- A location that is not near any kind of heating devices  
Power Source  
The power source requirements are as follows.  
G
Voltage Fluctuation: AC110V -10%, AC127V +6%, or AC220-240 V 10%  
Frequency Fluctuation: Within 3Hz  
G
H
Use a power source with as few voltage or frequency fluctuations as possible.  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.1 Installation Precautions  
2
Space Requirements  
To ensure easy machine operation, supply replacement, and maintenance, adhere  
to the recommended space requirements detailed below.  
516mm  
( 20.3inch )  
772mm  
( 30.4inch )  
Note  
In order to enable easy machine maintenance and replacement of  
consumables, maintain an adequate amount of space around the machine.  
When lifting the machine, be sure to grab the handles on the left and right sides  
from the rear of the machine. If the machine is lifted from its front, it may become  
unbalanced and fall.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2 Operation Precautions  
2
2.2  
Operation Precautions  
Operating Environment  
The environmental requirements for correct operation of the machine are as  
follows:  
G
Temperature: 50°F to 86°F with fluctuations of no more than 18°F within an hour  
Humidity: 15% to 85% with fluctuations of no more than 10% within an hour  
G
Proper Use  
To ensure the optimum performance of the machine, follow the precautions listed  
below:  
- Never place heavy objects on the Original Glass or subject it to shocks.  
- Never open any machine doors or turn off the machine while it is making copies/  
printing, as a paper misfeed could result.  
- Never bring any magnetized object, or use flammable sprays or liquids, near the  
machine.  
Always make sure that the power plug is completely plugged into the electrical  
output.  
- Always make sure that the machine’s power plug is visible and not hidden by  
the machine.  
Always unplug the machine from the electrical outlet if the machine is not to be  
used for a long period of time.  
Always provide good ventilation when making a large number of continuous  
copies/printed pages.  
CAUTION  
A negligible amount of ozone is generated during normal operation of this  
machine. An unpleasant odor may, however, be detected in poorly ventilated  
rooms during extensive machine operations.  
§
For a comfortable operating environment, it is recommended that the room be  
well ventilated.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2 Operation Precautions  
2
CAUTION  
The area around the Fusing Unit is extremely hot.  
§
In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any area other than those  
indicated in the manual. Be especially careful not to touch parts marked with  
warning labels, and their surrounding areas.  
Transporting the Machine  
If you need to transport the machine over a long distance, consult your service  
representative.  
Care of Machine Supplies  
Use the following precautions when handling the machine supplies (toner, paper,  
etc.).  
Store the supplies in a location that meets the following requirements:  
Free from direct sunlight  
Away from any heating apparatus  
Not subjected to high humidity  
Not extremely dusty  
Paper that has been removed from its wrapper but not loaded in the machine  
should be stored in a sealed plastic bag in a cool, dark place.  
- Use only toner that has been manufactured specifically for this machine. Never  
use other types of toner.  
- Keep all supplies out of the reach of children.  
CAUTION  
Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes  
or hands.  
§
If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with soap and  
water.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.3 Legal Restrictions on Copying  
2
2.3  
Legal Restrictions on Copying  
Certain types of documents must not be copied with the purpose or intent to pass  
copies of such documents off as the originals.  
The following is not a complete list, but is meant to be used as a guide to  
responsible copying.  
<Financial Instruments>  
G
G
G
G
G
G
Personal checks  
Travelers checks  
Money orders  
Certificates of deposit  
Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness  
Stock certificates  
<Legal Documents>  
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
Food stamps  
Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled)  
Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies  
Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled)  
Passports  
Immigration papers  
Motor vehicle licenses and titles  
House and property titles and deeds  
<General>  
G
Identification cards, badges, or insignias  
Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner  
G
In addition, it is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign  
currencies, or works of art, without permission of the copyright owner.  
When in doubt about the nature of a document, consult with legal counsel.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Before Making  
Copies or  
Faxing  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.1 Available Features  
3
3.1  
Available Features  
The main copy settings available with this machine are listed below. For details on  
their operation, refer to the pages indicated.  
Copies  
G
1-sided copies (p. 4-2)  
G
2in1 copies (p. 4-13)  
Note  
Available only with  
FAX3900  
Zoom Ratio  
Reduced/Full Size/Enlarged  
(p. 4-9)  
G
Finishing  
G
Sort (p. 4-14)  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.2 Components and Their Functions  
3
3.2  
Components and Their Functions  
Main Unit  
G
FAX2900/3900  
Paper Feed Cassette (option)  
Capable of holding up to 500 sheets of paper.  
G
32 MB Memory (option only for FAX3900)  
Increases the machine’s memory. By increasing the machine’s memory, more  
G
pages can be scanned.  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.3 Parts Names and Their Functions  
3
3.3  
Parts Names and Their Functions  
Main Unit  
No. Part Name  
Description  
1
Document Feeder Tray Load the originals to be scanned face up on this tray.  
Up to 50 document sheets can be loaded at one time.  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.3 Parts Names and Their Functions  
3
No. Part Name  
Description  
2
Document Feeder  
Cover (Doc. Feed  
Cover)  
Opened when clearing an original that has been misfed.  
3
4
5
Document Guide Plate Slide the guide plate to the size of the originals.  
Document Exit Tray  
Front Cover  
Receives originals which have been scanned by the machine.  
Opened when replacing the Toner Cartridge or drum cartridge, or  
clearing a paper misfeed.  
6
Bypass Tray  
Used to manually feed paper.  
Holds up to 10 sheets of plain paper.  
7
8
Tray1 door  
Copy Tray  
If Legal-size paper is installed, open this door.  
Holds copies fed out face down from the machine.  
The Copy Tray can be adjusted to one of three angles. Adjust the Copy  
Tray to the angle appropriate for its application.  
9
Tray1  
Holds up to 250 sheets of paper and easily adjusts to different paper  
sizes.  
Special paper can be used.  
10  
11  
12  
Control Panel  
Power Switch  
Used to start a print cycle and make necessary settings.  
Used to turn the machine on and off.  
Externaltelephonejack Used for connecting a line to a telephone.  
(TEL PORT)  
13  
14  
Telephone line jack for Used for connecting to a standard telephone line.  
line 1 (LINE PORT 1)  
USB Port  
For details, refer to the User Manual for the printer controller.  
Inside the Machine  
1
No. Part Name  
Description  
1
Imaging Cartridge  
Generates the print image.  
The Imaging Cartridge is constructed of both the Drum Cartridge and  
the Toner Cartridge set into place.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.3 Parts Names and Their Functions  
3
Adjusting the Angle of the Copy Tray  
The Copy Tray can be adjusted to one of three angles. Adjust the tray to the angle  
appropriate for the desired application.  
1. Normal operation (standard position)  
2. When back curled paper is fed out  
3. When clearing a paper misfeed or replacing the Drum Cartridge or Toner  
Cartridge  
Note  
Adjust the Tray Extension and Paper Stopper to fit the size of the paper.  
For Legal-size paper  
For A4-size paper  
For Letter-size paper  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.3 Parts Names and Their Functions  
3
Paper Feed Cassette (option)  
No. Part Name  
Tray2  
Description  
1
Holds up to 500 sheets of paper.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.4 Control Panel  
3
3.4  
Control Panel  
Names of Control Panel Parts and Their Functions  
For FAX3900  
22  
21  
19  
18  
17  
20  
Error  
Yes  
Scan  
Fax  
16  
15  
@
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
Copy  
123/ABC  
Stop  
GHI  
MNO  
No  
C
Panel Reset  
1
2
14  
PORS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
2in1  
Utility  
Sort  
Printer  
Status  
Paper  
Start  
Auto/Photo  
Zoom  
12  
11  
13  
10  
4
5
6
8
3
7
9
28  
27  
25  
24  
26  
23  
Resolution  
Speaker  
Phone Book  
Redial/Pause  
Speed Dial  
Function  
Auto RX  
Memory TX  
29  
08/40  
16/48  
24/56  
32/64  
02/34  
10/42  
18/50  
26/58  
05/37  
13/45  
21/53  
29/61  
06/38  
14/46  
22/54  
30/62  
07/39  
01/33  
09/41  
17/49  
25/57  
03/35  
11/43  
19/51  
27/59  
04/36  
12/44  
15/47  
23/55  
31/63  
20/52  
28/60  
30  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.4 Control Panel  
3
For FAX2900  
22  
21  
19  
18  
20  
Error  
Yes  
Fax  
16  
15  
@
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
Copy  
123/ABC  
Stop  
GHI  
MNO  
No  
C
Panel Reset  
1
14  
PORS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
Utility  
Sort  
Printer  
Status  
Paper  
Start  
2
Auto/Photo  
Zoom  
12  
11  
13  
10  
4
5
6
8
3
9
28  
27  
25  
24  
26  
23  
Resolution  
Speaker  
Phone Book  
Redial/Pause  
Speed Dial  
Function  
Auto RX  
Memory TX  
29  
05  
13  
21  
29  
06  
14  
22  
30  
07  
15  
23  
31  
08  
16  
24  
32  
02  
01  
09  
17  
25  
03  
11  
19  
27  
04  
12  
10  
18  
26  
30  
20  
28  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.4 Control Panel  
3
No. Part Name  
Description  
1
2
3
[Utility] key  
Press to enter Utility mode.  
For details, refer to “Utility Mode” on page 7-2.  
[Printer] key  
Press to enter Printer mode.  
For details, refer to the User Manual for the printer controller.  
Ö
[
] [Ö ] key  
Press to adjust the image density.  
Press to specify the various settings.  
4
5
[Auto/Photo] key  
[Status] key  
Press to change the image density mode.  
Press to view the counters and transmission results. In addition, the list  
of settings specified for each function and the reports can be printed.  
(p. 3-31)  
6
7
[Paper] key  
[2in1] key  
Press to select the paper tray and paper source.  
Press to select the 2in1 function.  
Available only with FAX3900  
8
[] [] key  
Press to change the zoom ratio in the range between × 0.50 and  
× 2.00 in × 0.01 increments.  
Press to scan through the various settings and information, in order.  
Press to specify the various settings.  
9
[Zoom] key  
Press to select a zoom ratio from among the standard fixed ones  
available.  
10  
11  
[Sort] key  
Press to select the sort function.  
10-key pad  
Used to enter the number of copies to be made and any other  
numeric data.  
Used to enter text such as a name.  
In the Fax mode, use the [ ] key for tone transmission (with pulse  
dialing) and use the [#] key for accessing an outside line.  
Ö
12  
13  
[Stop] key  
[Start] key  
Press to stop a print cycle.  
Press to stop a scanning sequence.  
Stops the fax transmission or reception.  
The indicator flashes in orange when the machine is paused or while  
printing.  
Press to start a scanning or print cycle.  
Starts a fax transmission.  
Press to specify the various settings.  
The indicator lights up in green when the machine can accept print jobs.  
14  
15  
[Panel Reset] key  
[Copy] key  
Press to reset all print functions and settings to their defaults.  
Press to enter Copy mode. The indicator lights up in green to indicate  
that the machine is in Copy mode.  
16  
17  
[Fax] key  
Press to enter Fax mode. The indicator lights up in green to indicate that  
the machine is in Fax mode.  
[Scan] key  
Press to enter Scan mode. The indicator lights up in green to indicate  
that the machine is in Scan mode.  
Available only with FAX3900  
18  
19  
[123/ABC] key  
Error lamp  
Press to switch the 10-Key Pad between typing in numbers and typing  
in letters.  
The indicator lights up in orange if an error or malfunction occurs.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.4 Control Panel  
3
No. Part Name  
Description  
20  
[Yes] key  
Press to validate the setting just made.  
Press to specify the various settings.  
21  
[No]/[C] key  
Press to reset the number of copies to “1”.  
Press to clear the various settings.  
Press to return to the previous screen.  
Press to specify the various settings.  
Erases the entered numbers and letters.  
22  
23  
Display  
Shows the number of copies to be made, the zoom ratio, and other  
setting data.  
[Function] key  
Used to select a function.  
BROADCAST (broadcast transmission), TIMER TX (timer  
transmission), MAILBOX TX (mailbox transmission), PRINT MAILBOX  
RX (retrieve mailbox faxes), POLLING TX (polling transmission),  
POLLING RX (polling reception), RELAY INITIATE (relay initiation  
transmission), CANCEL RESERV. (cancel queued job), TX MODE  
(transmission mode), INTERNET FAX RX  
Available only with FAX3900  
24  
25  
[Speed Dial] key  
Used to dial previously programmed fax numbers represented by 3-digit  
numbers.  
[Redial/Pause] key  
Redials the last number called.  
While dialing, used to generate a pause when transferring from an  
internal to an external line or receiving information services.  
26  
[Phone Book] key  
Used to display the information programmed for one-touch dialing,  
group dialing and speed dialing.  
27  
28  
29  
[Speaker] key  
Press to answer the call. Press again to hang up.  
Used to select the image quality (transmission resolution).  
Used to select the Memory TX or Auto RX function  
[Resolution] key  
Memory TX/Auto RX  
lamp  
30  
One-touch dial key  
Used to dial previously programmed fax numbers.  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.4 Control Panel  
3
Display Indications  
In Copy mode:  
1
2
3
[A]  
4
5
No. Display Indication  
Description  
1
2
3
Document type  
Zoom ratio  
Displays the document type currently specified for the image density.  
Displays the currently specified zoom ratio.  
Number of copies  
Displays the currently specified number of copy pages and number of  
copy sets.  
4
5
Image density  
Paper  
Displays the currently specified image density.  
Displays the currently selected paper tray, paper size, and paper type.  
In Fax mode:  
3
4
5
6
2
1
1
SCAN TO E-MAIL/FILE  
2
No. Display Indication  
Description  
1
2
Messages  
Mode or function name  
Displays messages such as operating instructions.  
Displays the current menu, function or settings.  
Error messages are displayed when errors occur.  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.4 Control Panel  
3
No. Display Indication  
Description  
3
4
5
6
Time  
The current time is displayed during standby.  
The setting resolution is displayed during standby.  
Indicates the currently selected mode or function settings.  
The remaining memory is displayed during standby.  
Resolution  
Symbol  
Memory  
Symbol list:  
Symbol  
Description  
Manual bypass  
Paper is loaded in the Manual Bypass Tray.  
Custom paper size  
The paper setting for the Manual Bypass Tray is a custom paper  
size.  
Dialing  
A fax number is being dialed.  
Ringing  
Sending  
Receiving  
The machine is being called.  
The document is being sent.  
A document is being received.  
In standby for timer  
transmission  
A document is queued for timer transmission.  
A document is queued for polling transmission.  
A document is queued for mailbox reception.  
In standby for polling  
transmission  
In standby for mailbox  
reception  
In standby for memory A document is queued for memory reception or polling reception.  
reception or polling  
reception  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.5 Turning the Machine On/Off Initial Mode  
3
3.5  
Turning the Machine On/Off Initial Mode  
Turning the Machine On/Off  
To turn on the machine:  
§
Press the | (on) side of the Power  
Switch.  
To turn off the machine:  
§
Press the 2 (off) side of the Power  
Switch.  
Note  
Do not turn off the machine while a print cycle is being performed, as a paper  
misfeed will result. Before attempting to turn off the machine, always be sure  
that the current print cycle has been completed.  
Turning off the machine will initialize all settings except those for previously  
programmed jobs and for the Utility mode.  
Do not turn off the machine while it is scanning or sending or receiving data,  
otherwise all scanned data or transmission data will be deleted.  
The machine automatically enters the Energy Save mode 15 min after the last  
operation is performed.  
The time until the machine enters Energy Save mode can be specified from the  
Utility mode. For details, refer to “Specifying the Setting for “ENERGY SAVE  
MODE”” on page 7-6 in the chapter “Using the Utility Mode”.  
When the Machine is Turned On  
When the machine is turned on, the [Start] key indicator lights up in orange to  
indicate that the machine is ready to begin printing.  
At this time, the machine can be set for the Auto Print Start function by loading a  
document into the Auto Document Feeder, and pressing the [Start] key.  
Pressing the [Start] key at this time will not immediately start the print cycle. You will  
have to wait for less than 25 seconds (at an ambient temperature of 73.4°F).  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.5 Turning the Machine On/Off Initial Mode  
3
Default Settings  
When the machine is turned on, the Initial mode screen appears in the Display of  
the Control Panel. The Initial mode screen appears at the beginning of all  
operations.  
[A]  
Factory default settings  
G
G
G
G
G
Number of copies: 1  
Image density: TEXT Auto  
Zoom ratio: 100% (full size)  
Paper: Tray1  
Finishing: Non-Sort  
Tip  
The default settings can be customized from the Utility mode. For details, refer  
to “Utility Mode” on page 7-2.  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.6 Useful Functions  
3
3.6  
Useful Functions  
Panel Resetting  
Press the [Panel Reset] key to return all modes and functions (zoom ratio, number  
of copies, etc.) to their defaults. (All selected settings are canceled.)  
Tip  
The [Panel Reset] key comes in handy for canceling all selected settings at one  
time.  
To avoid accidentally using settings from the previous print job, press the [Panel  
Reset] key to return all functions and settings to their defaults before specifying  
any settings for your current job.  
Auto Panel Reset  
Even if the [Panel Reset] key is not pressed, the machine automatically resets all  
functions and settings to their defaults 1 min after a print cycle has been completed  
or a key operation is performed.  
Tip  
The length of time before the machine automatically resets itself can be set  
between 1 min and 5 min in addition to 30 seconds. The Auto Panel Reset  
function can even be disabled.  
For details, refer to “Specifying the Setting for “AUTO PANEL RESET”” on  
page 7-5.  
Energy Save Mode  
Instead of turning off the machine, it can be set into a standby state (Energy Save  
mode).  
If the machine is not used for a set length of time, it will automatically enter the  
Energy Save mode. The default length of time is 15 min.  
To cancel the Energy Save mode, press any key on the control panel.  
Tip  
The length of time before the machine enters the Energy Save mode can be set  
between 1 min and 240 min.  
For details, refer to “Specifying the Setting for “ENERGY SAVE MODE”” on  
page 7-6.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.6 Useful Functions  
3
Auto Print Start  
If a document is loaded and the [Start] key is pressed during the period after the  
machine has been turned on but before it is ready to make print, the machine will  
automatically start the print cycle as soon as it completes the warm-up cycle.  
Auto Tray Switching  
If the tray runs out of paper while printing, the machine will automatically switch to  
a different paper source and continue printing provided that the new tray contains  
paper of the same type and size in the same orientation.  
If the optional Paper Feed Cassette is installed, a maximum of 750 pages can be  
continuously printed.  
Tray1 Tray2 (Paper Feed Cassette)  
Tray2 (Paper Feed Cassette) Tray1  
Tip  
Auto tray switching can be disabled. For details, refer to “Setting Up the Paper  
Sources” on page 7-12.  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.7 Entering Text  
3
3.7  
Entering Text  
When specifying the user name or programming one-touch dial keys with the  
recipient name, letters, accented characters, numbers, and symbols can be  
entered.  
Key operation:  
G
10-Key Pad: Used to enter numbers and letters, symbols.  
List of characters available with each key of the 10-Key Pad:  
10-Key Pad  
Available characters*  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
. (period) @_ (underscore) - (hyphen) 1  
ABC2abc  
DEF3def  
GHI4ghi  
JKL5jkl  
MNO6mno  
PQRS7pqrs  
TUV8tuv  
WXYZ9wxyz  
+&/ =!?( )%[ ]^‘’{ }|˜$,:;<>“¿£  
(space) 0  
0
#
#
*
To switch the input mode of the 10-Key Pad between numbers and letters, press the [123/ABC] key.  
Changing Input Mode  
Each press of the [123/ABC] key switches the input mode between numbers and  
letters.  
[1]: Numbers can be typed in.  
[A]: Letters can be typed in.  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.7 Entering Text  
3
Inputting Example  
To enter the name “NJ Office”  
* The cursor (_) flashes alternately with the character at its current location.  
Press the [123/ABC] key.  
Press the [6] key twice.  
Press the [5] key once.  
Press the [0] key once.  
Press the [6] key 3 times.  
Press the [3] key 7 times.  
Press the [ Ö ] key.  
Press the [3] key 7 times.  
Press the [4] key 7 times.  
Press the [2] key 7 times.  
Press the [3] key 6 times.  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.7 Entering Text  
3
Correcting text and input precautions  
G
To erase all entered text, press the [Panel Reset] key.  
Ö
Ö
G
To delete only part of the entered text, use the [ ] and [ ] keys to move the  
cursor (_) to the character that you wish to delete, and then press the [No] key.  
Ö
Ö
G
To change an entered character, use the [ ] and [ ] keys to move the cursor  
(_) below the character that you wish to change, and then press the [No] key.  
Next, enter the new character. (The character at the cursor's position is  
replaced with the new character.)  
G
G
If the same 10-Key Pad is needed to enter two characters in a row, press the  
Ö
[
] key after selecting the first character. (Refer to the above example.)  
To enter a space, press 10-Key Pad [0].  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.8 Copy Paper  
3
3.8  
Copy Paper  
Paper Specifications  
The following table specifies the type and size of paper to be used with each tray  
together with its capacity.  
Tray1  
Specifications  
Paper Type  
Plain paper, recycled paper (16 lb to 24 lb)  
Exclusive paper: card (24-1/4 lb to 43-1/4 lb) , OHP transparencies,  
envelopes  
Paper Size  
Capacity  
A4 L, B5 L, A5 L, 16K L, Legal L, Letter L, Invoice L, FLS (13 × 8-1/4)  
Custom Size: Width: 3-1/2 to 8-1/2; length: 5-1/2 to 14  
Plain paper, recycled paper: 250 sheets (20 lb)  
Exclusive paper: card; 5 sheets, OHP transparencies; 5 sheets,  
envelopes; 1 sheet  
Tray2  
Specifications  
Paper Type  
Paper Size  
Capacity  
Plain paper, recycled paper (16 lb to 24 lb)  
Letter L, A4 L*  
500 sheets (20 lb)  
Bypass Tray  
Specifications  
Paper Type  
Plain paper, recycled paper (16 lb to 24 lb)  
Exclusive paper: card (24-1/4 lb to 43-1/4 lb) , OHP transparencies,  
envelopes, label sheets  
Paper Size  
Capacity  
A4 L, B5 L, A5 L, 16K L, Legal L, Letter L, Invoice L, FLS (13 × 8-1/4)  
Custom Size: Width: 3-1/2 to 8-1/2; length: 5-1/2 to 14  
Plain paper, recycled paper: 10 sheets (20 lb)  
Exclusive paper: cards; 1 sheet, OHP transparencies; 1 sheet,  
envelopes; 1 sheet  
Precautions for Loading Paper  
G
Be sure to observe the paper specifications (paper type, paper size, and  
capacity) for each tray, otherwise a paper misfeed could result.  
G
When paper is loaded into the Bypass Tray, a message appears, indicating that  
the paper size be specified. Specify the size and type of paper that is loaded.  
Paper loaded into the Bypass Tray is given priority during feeding.  
G
The size of FLS is preset to 13 × 8-1/4. To change the FLS size, contact a  
service representative.  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.8 Copy Paper  
3
Unsuitable Paper  
The following types of paper should not be used, otherwise decreased print quality,  
paper misfeeds, or damage to the machine may occur.  
G
Overhead projector transparencies that have already been fed through the  
machine  
Even if the transparency is still blank, do not reuse it.  
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
Paper that has been printed on by a heat-transfer printer or an inkjet printer  
Paper that is either extremely thick or extremely thin  
Folded, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper  
Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time  
Damp paper  
Perforated paper or paper with punched holes  
Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper, or paper with an uneven surface  
Paper that has been treated, such as carbon-backed, heat-sensitive or  
pressure-sensitive paper  
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing  
Paper of a non-standard shape (not rectangular)  
Paper that is bound with glue, staples or paper clips  
Paper with labels attached  
Paper with ribbons, hooks, buttons, etc. attached  
Curled or wrinkled paper  
Art paper, coated paper, or inkjet printer paper  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.8 Copy Paper  
3
Loading Paper  
While loading paper, be sure to observe the following precautions.  
G
If the paper is curled, flatten it  
before loading it.  
G
Do not load so much paper that  
the top of the stack is higher than  
the mark or exceeds the  
specified number of sheets.  
G
Push the paper guides firmly up  
against the edges of the paper.  
G
When loading additional paper,  
remove any paper remaining in  
the drawer, place it on top of the  
new paper, and then align the  
paper in the stack well, before  
loading it into the drawer.  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.8 Copy Paper  
3
G
When loading envelopes, load  
them with the flap facing down, as  
shown in the illustration at the  
right.  
<Bypass Tray>  
Note  
Before loading envelopes, press  
them down to make sure that all air  
is removed, and make sure that  
the folds of the flaps are firmly  
pressed, otherwise the envelopes  
may become wrinkled or a paper  
misfeed may occur.  
<Tray1>  
Only 1 envelope at a time can be  
loaded in Tray1 and the Bypass  
Tray.  
Tip  
We recommend replenishing the paper only after all of the paper in the drawer  
has been used.  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.8 Copy Paper  
3
Loading Paper into Tray1  
1 Remove the Bypass Tray.  
2 Load the paper into the tray so that  
the front side of the paper (the side  
facing up when the package was  
unwrapped) faces up.  
3 Slide the paper guides against the  
edges of the paper.  
<When Legal-size paper is installed>  
H
If Legal-size paper is installed,  
open the door of Tray1.  
4 Attach the Bypass Tray in its original position.  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.8 Copy Paper  
3
Note  
If paper with a different size or type is loaded, various settings must be specified  
from the “PAPER SOURCE SETUP” menu in the Utility mode. If the settings are  
not correctly specified, paper size error may occur. For details, refer to  
“Specifying the Setting for “TRAY SETTING”” on page 7-14.  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.8 Copy Paper  
3
Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray  
1 Load the paper so that the front  
side of the paper (the side facing  
up when the package was  
unwrapped) faces up.  
2 Slide the paper guides against the  
edges of the paper.  
Note  
When paper is loaded into the Bypass Tray, the paper size and type must be  
specified, otherwise paper size error may occur. For details, refer to “Specifying  
the Size and Type on the Manual Bypass Tray” on page 4-5.  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.8 Copy Paper  
3
Loading Paper into Tray2 (option)  
1 Pull out the drawer for Tray2.  
2 Remove the drawer cover, and  
then press down on the paper-  
lifting plate until it locks into place.  
3 Load the paper into the drawer so  
that the front side of the paper (the  
side facing up when the package  
was unwrapped) faces up.  
4 Attach the drawer cover, and then return the drawer for Tray2 to its original  
position.  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.9 Loading Originals  
3
3.9  
Loading Originals  
Loading Originals in the Auto Document Feeder  
The Auto Document Feeder automatically feeds originals one page after another so  
that the machine can scan the data on each page. After the machine finishes  
scanning the data, the Auto Document Feeder ejects the page into the Exit Tray.  
To ensure the best possible performance of the Auto Document Feeder, use only  
originals of the specified type.  
Specific Types of Originals  
Original Loading Original Type  
Original Size  
Auto Document  
Feeder  
Sheet originals  
Weight of originals: 9-1/4 lb to 34 lb  
A4 L, B5 L, A5 L, Legal L to Invoice,  
16K L, FLS  
Original width: 5-1/2 to 8-1/2  
Original length: 5 to 14  
Precautions for Loading Paper Into the Auto Document Feeder  
The following types of originals are not suitable for use in the Auto Document  
Feeder, as a misfeed or damaged original could result.  
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
Typing paper, paraffin paper, and other thin paper  
Cards  
Originals larger than Legal L or smaller than Invoice  
OHP transparencies, translucent paper  
Wrinkled, dog-eared, curled, or torn originals  
Clipped or stapled originals  
Coated originals such as carbon-backed paper  
Up to 20 Letter-size document pages can be scanned and stored in the memory  
at one time. However, if the optional expansion memory is installed, up to 170  
scanned pages can be stored  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.9 Loading Originals  
3
Loading Originals into the Auto Document Feeder  
1 Place the stack of originals face up  
on the auto Document Feeder  
Tray.  
Note  
A maximum of 50 document  
pages can be loaded.  
Do not load so many pages that the top of the stack is higher than the t mark.  
Be sure to adjust the document guides so that they are against the edges of  
the document, otherwise the document may not be fed in straight.  
2 Slide the front adjustable  
Document Guide Plate to the size  
of the originals.  
3 Specify the desired copy or fax settings.  
H
H
“Making Copies” on page 4-1  
“Basic Faxing” on page 5-13  
4 Press the [Start] key to start  
feeding and copying the originals  
from the top page.  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.10 Checking the Machine Status  
3
3.10 Checking the Machine Status  
The total number of pages printed and scanned since this machine was installed  
can be checked.  
Menu  
Item  
Description  
TOTAL PAGE  
TOTAL COUNT  
Displays the total number of pages printed since  
this machine was installed.  
TOTAL SCAN  
Displays the total number of pages scanned  
since this machine was installed.  
However, the scanned number of pages in copy  
are not included.  
TX PAGES  
RX PAGES  
Displays the total number of pages faxed since  
this machine was installed.  
Displays the total number of pages received  
since this machine was installed.  
TX/RX RESULT  
PRINT REPORT  
TX RESULT REPORT  
RX RESULT REPORT  
TX RESULT REPORT  
RX RESULT REPORT  
ACTIVITY REPORT  
MEMORY DATA LIST  
Displays the transmission result report.  
Displays the reception result report.  
Prints the transmission result report.  
Prints the reception result report.  
Prints the transmission/reception result report.  
Prints the list of documents stored in the  
memory.  
MEMORY IMAGE PRINT  
ONE-TOUCH LIST  
SPEED DIAL LIST  
Prints the reduced image of the first page of the  
document stored in the memory.  
Prints the recipients programmed in the one-  
touch dial keys.  
Prints the recipients programmed for the speed  
dial numbers.  
KEY SETTING LIST  
Prints the settings specified for one-touch dial  
keys.  
MACHINE STATUS  
Prints the current machine status.  
Prints the current machine configuration.  
Prints the Relay Box list  
CONFIGRATION PAGE  
RELAY BOX LIST  
Available only with FAX3900  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.10 Checking the Machine Status  
3
Checking the “TOTAL PAGE” Counts  
1 Press the [Status] key.  
2 Press the [Yes] key.  
Yes  
3 Press the [] and [] keys to  
check the “TOTAL COUNT”,  
“TOTAL SCAN”, “TX PAGES”, or  
“RX PAGES” values.  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.10 Checking the Machine Status  
3
Checking the “TX/RX RESULT”  
1 Press the [Status] key twice.  
2 Press the [Yes] key.  
Yes  
3 Press the [] and [] keys to  
display the desired transmission  
results to check them.  
H
H
H
In the transmission result  
screen, “TX” indicates sent  
faxes, and “RX” indicates  
received ones.  
If the [No] key is pressed twice  
while the transmission results  
are displayed, the main screen  
appears.  
To print the transmission result report, press the [Start] key. After the  
transmission result report is printed, the main screen appears.  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.10 Checking the Machine Status  
3
To output a report/list  
1 Press the [Status] key 3 times.  
2 Press the [Yes] key.  
Yes  
3 Press the [] and [] keys to  
select the report/list that you wish  
to print, and then press the [Yes]  
key.  
After the specified report/list is  
printed, the main screen appears again.  
Tip  
The reception/transmission result reports can be checked on screen. For  
details on viewing the transmission result, refer to “Checking the “TX/RX  
RESULT”” on page 3-33.  
The following reports and lists can be printed.  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.10 Checking the Machine Status  
3
TX Result Report  
The document number, recipient name, date sent, starting time of transmission,  
number of document pages, time required, mode, and transmission result are  
printed.  
SESSION  
0001  
FUNCTION  
TX  
No.  
001  
DESTINATION STATION DATE  
TIME  
18:00  
PAGE  
010  
DURATION MODE  
00:02'21" G3  
RESULT  
NG  
AAA NEWYORK  
012345678  
APR.19  
NG PAGE:1.3.5.7  
RX Result Report  
The document number, caller name, date received, starting time of reception,  
number of pages received, time required, mode, and reception result are printed.  
SESSION  
0001  
FUNCTION  
RX  
No.  
001  
DESTINATION STATION DATE  
TIME  
18:00  
PAGE DURATION MODE  
001 00:02'21" ECM  
RESULT  
NG  
AAA TOKYO  
098765432  
APR.19  
0021:ERROR DURING RX  
Activity Report  
The operation number, document number, date of operation, starting time of  
transmission/reception, type of operation (transmission or reception), recipient/  
caller name, number of pages sent/received, mode, and transmission/reception  
result are printed.  
The machine can also be set to print this report automatically after every 60  
transmissions/receptions.  
No.  
01  
02  
03  
04  
SESSION  
DATE  
TIME  
16:32  
18:00  
18:00  
19:12  
TX/RX  
TX---  
---RX  
---RX  
TX---  
DESTINATION  
STATION  
PAGE  
DURATION  
00:01'16"  
00:02'21"  
00:02'48"  
00:00'56"  
MODE  
ECM  
ECM  
ECM  
ECM  
RESULT  
0001  
APR.19  
APR.19  
APR.19  
APR.19  
AAA NEWYORK  
012345678  
006  
OK  
0002  
AAA TOKYO  
098765432  
001  
NG  
0002  
AAA TOKYO  
098765432  
012  
OK  
0003  
HEAD OFFICE  
024682468  
001  
OK  
Memory Data List  
This is a list of documents stored in the memory and waiting to be sent, and  
documents specified for timer transmission, batch transmission, or polling  
reception.  
The document number, type of operation being performed, time, recipient/caller  
name, and number of document pages are printed.  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.10 Checking the Machine Status  
3
Memory Image Print  
A reduced image of the first page of the document stored in the memory and waiting  
to be sent, in addition to the document number, type of operation being performed,  
recipient/caller name, date, time, and number of document pages are printed.  
One-Touch List  
The recipients programmed in the one-touch dial keys are printed in numerical  
order of the keys.  
OT-NO.  
OT-01  
OT-02  
OT-03  
OT-04  
DESTINATION STATION  
AAA NEWYORK  
AAA TOKYO  
DESTINATION NUMBER  
012345678  
BATCH TIME  
SPEED  
33.6  
SET DATE  
JAN.20.2001  
JAN.20.2001  
FEB.12.2001  
FEB.12.2001  
098765432  
14.4  
HEAD OFFICE  
NJ OFFICE  
024682468  
16:00  
33.6  
0P02345678  
SUB:#1234  
14.4  
Speed Dial List  
The recipients programmed for the speed dial numbers are printed in numerical  
order.  
SP-NO.  
SP-001  
SP-002  
SP-003  
SP-004  
DESTINATION STATION  
AMSTERDAM OFFICE  
KOREA OFFICE  
ABCDEF  
DESTINATION NUMBER  
0P09876543  
SPEED  
33.6  
SET DATE  
JAN.20.2001  
JAN.20.2001  
FEB.12.2001  
FEB.12.2001  
0P01357913  
14.4  
024682468  
33.6  
POST OFFICE  
0224466880  
SUB:#5678  
14.4  
Key Setting List  
The group dialing and program dialing settings specified for one-touch dial keys are  
printed in numerical order of the keys.  
Machine Status  
The current machine settings are printed.  
Configuration Page  
The list of the printer settings is printed.  
Relay Box List (Available only with FAX3900)  
The list of the Relay Box is printed.  
3-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.11 Print Area  
3
3.11 Print Area  
Any part of the image within the area indicated below is not copied.  
G
G
G
A margin 1/4 (at full size) from the leading edge of the paper (A)  
A margin 1/4 (at full size) from the trailing edge of the paper (B)  
A margin 1/4 (at full size) on both sides of the paper (C)  
For details on using the machine to print from a computer when the printer controller  
is installed, refer to the User Manual for the printer controller.  
A: 1/4 (at full size)  
B: 1/4 (at full size)  
C: 1/4 (at full size)  
Paper output direction  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.11 Print Area  
3
3-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Making Copies  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1 Making a Basic Copy  
4
4.1  
Making a Basic Copy  
The following procedure describes how to place an original and make a basic copy  
of it.  
1 Position the original.  
2 Select the paper tray.  
H
“Selecting the Paper” on  
page 4-4  
Paper  
3 Specify the zoom ratio.  
“Specifying the Zoom Ratio” on  
page 4-9  
Zoom  
H
4 Specify the image density.  
H
“Adjusting the Image Density”  
on page 4-11  
Auto/Photo  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1 Making a Basic Copy  
4
5 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
number of copies to be made. Any  
number from 1 to 99 can be  
entered.  
EFG  
NOP  
A
BCD  
KLM  
2
5
4
7
3
6
HIJ  
XYZ[  
QPST  
UVW  
9
:
$
8
1
+
6 Press the [Start] key.  
This will start the print cycle.  
H
H
H
To stop the print cycle in mid-  
operation, press the [Stop]  
key.  
To cancel the print job, press  
the [No] key or the [Panel  
Reset] key.  
To restart the print cycle, press  
the [Start] key.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2 Selecting the Paper  
4
4.2  
Selecting the Paper  
Before making a copy, the tray containing the paper to be used must be selected.  
Either a paper tray can be selected or paper can be loaded into the Bypass Tray.  
Manual Paper Selection  
The tray containing the paper you want to use can be manually selected.  
Note  
The optional Paper Feed Cassette is required.  
Selecting Manually Fed Paper  
When the desired paper is loaded into the Bypass Tray and the paper size and type  
are specified, paper loaded into the Bypass Tray is given priority during feeding.  
Manually Selecting the Paper Size  
1 Position the original.  
2 Press the [Paper] key until the tray  
loaded with the desired paper is  
selected.  
Note  
If paper is loaded into the  
Bypass Tray, first remove it.  
If Tray1 is selected, the paper  
size must first be specified. For  
details, refer to “Selecting the  
“PAPER SOURCE SETUP”  
menu” on page 7-12.  
3 Make the other necessary settings.  
H
H
“Specifying the Zoom Ratio” on page 4-9  
“Adjusting the Image Density” on page 4-11  
4 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the number of copies to be made, and then press  
the [Start] key.  
This will start the print cycle.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2 Selecting the Paper  
4
Specifying the Size and Type on the Manual Bypass Tray  
1 Position the original.  
2 Load paper into the Bypass Tray.  
H
“Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray” on page 3-27  
3 The message shown at the right  
appears. Press the [No] key.  
No  
C
4 Press the [  
] and [  
] keys  
until the desired paper type is  
selected.  
Tip  
Auto/Photo  
Pressing the [  
keys moves “  
paper type.  
] and [  
” to select the  
]
To return to the previous  
message, press the [No] key.  
5 Press the [Yes] key.  
Yes  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2 Selecting the Paper  
4
6 Press the [  
] and [  
] key to select the  
] keys or  
press the [  
size of paper that is loaded. If  
“CUSTOM” is not selected,  
continue with step 10.  
LG  
HL  
H
If “CUSTOM” is selected,  
perform steps 7 through 10.  
Auto/Photo  
Note  
If “OHP” was selected in step  
4, the only paper sizes that can  
be loaded are A4 and Letter.  
Zoom  
Tip  
Pressing the [  
keys moves “  
paper size.  
] and [  
” to select the  
]
To return to the previous  
message, press the [No] key.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2 Selecting the Paper  
4
7 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
width (X) of the paper.  
90-216  
H
To clear the entered value,  
press the [C] key.  
EFG  
NOP  
A
BCD  
3
2
5
4
7
Note  
HIJ  
KLM  
6
The width can range from  
90 mm (3-1/2) to 216 mm  
(8-1/2).  
XYZ[  
QPST  
UVW  
9
:
$
8
When entering the paper size,  
refer to the diagram on the  
right side of the screen to  
1
+
check which sides of the paper  
are the width and the length.  
Tray 1  
Tip  
Enter the value by mm using  
the 10-Key Pad. Refer to the  
conversion rate below.  
1 inch = 25.4 mm  
Bypass Tray  
8 Press the [Yes] key.  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2 Selecting the Paper  
4
9 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
length (Y) of the paper.  
140-356  
EFG  
NOP  
A
BCD  
KLM  
Note  
2
5
4
7
3
6
The length can range from  
140 mm (5-1/2) to 356 mm  
(14).  
HIJ  
XYZ[  
QPST  
UVW  
9
:
$
8
Tip  
Enter the value by mm using  
the 10-key Pad. Refer to the  
conversion rate below.  
1 inch = 25.4 mm  
1
+
10 Press the [Yes] key.  
11 Make the other necessary settings.  
H
H
“Specifying the Zoom Ratio” on page 4-9  
“Adjusting the Image Density” on page 4-11  
12 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
number of copies to be made, and  
then press the [Start] key.  
Tip  
To change the number of  
copies to be made, remove the  
paper from the Bypass Tray and then reload it. Repeat steps 11 and 12.  
Note  
The Bypass Tray can be loaded with a maximum of 1 envelope, 1 OHP  
transparency, 1 card, sheet, or 10 sheets of plain paper.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.3 Specifying the Zoom Ratio  
4
4.3  
Specifying the Zoom Ratio  
By specifying a zoom ratio, the copy can be enlarged or reduced.  
Zoom Ratio Settings  
Zoom Ratio Settings  
Description  
Fixed ratios  
The following optimum zoom ratios are available for making copies  
from commonly used original sizes to standard paper sizes.  
× 0.50  
× 0.64 (LT HL)  
× 0.78 (LG LT)  
× 1.29 (HL LT)  
× 1.54 (HL LG)  
× 2.00  
Ratios set using the Zoom [] Pressing the [] or [] key increases or decreases the zoom ratio in  
and [] keys  
× 0.01 increments.  
The ratio can range from × 0.50 to × 2.00.  
Full Size  
This setting makes a copy the same size as the original (× 1.00).  
Note  
LT: Letter  
HL: Half Letter  
LG: Legal  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.3 Specifying the Zoom Ratio  
4
Setting the Zoom Ratio  
1 Position the original.  
2 Press the [Zoom] key until the  
desired fixed ratio is selected.  
x1. 29  
LT  
H
Each press of the [Zoom] key  
changes the setting.  
HL LT  
Zoom  
H
To specify a zoom ratio other  
than a fixed ratio, press the  
x1. 28  
LT  
[
] and [  
] keys until the  
desired zoom ratio is specified.  
Pressing these keys change  
the ratio in x 0.01 increments.  
Zoom  
Tip  
To quickly specify the desired  
zoom ratio, select the nearest  
fixed ratio, and then press the  
[
] and [  
] keys until the desired zoom ratio is specified.  
3 Make the other necessary settings.  
H
H
“Selecting the Paper” on page 4-4  
“Adjusting the Image Density” on page 4-11  
4 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the number of copies to be made, and then press  
the [Start] key.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.4 Adjusting the Image Density  
4
4.4  
Adjusting the Image Density  
The image density setting can be adjusted in two broad modes, “Text” and “Photo”.  
Image Density Setting  
G
Text mode:  
The image density can be adjusted either automatically (Auto) or manually in  
nine steps.  
H
The image density is adjusted automatically according to the original from  
which a copy is to be made.  
H
Manual image density adjustment:  
The image density can be adjusted to one of nine levels.  
To reduce bleed-throughs when copying newspapers and magazines, press  
Ö
the [ ] key to select a lighter setting. To reproduce faint colors in brighter  
parts of the image, press the [ ] key to select a darker setting.  
Selecting a darker setting could result in a background image being  
reproduced on the copy, while selecting a lighter setting could make the copy  
image itself too light: Select the appropriate level according to your original.  
G
Photo mode:  
Select “Photo” when making a copy from an original having large halftone  
images, such as photos.  
Setting the Image Density  
1 Position the original.  
2 Press the [Auto/Photo] key on the  
control panel to select the desired  
mode.  
Auto/Photo  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.4 Adjusting the Image Density  
4
H
Each press of the [Auto/Photo]  
key changes the setting as  
shown at the right.  
[A]  
If Text mode is selected,  
“TEXT” is displayed.  
If the Auto setting is selected,  
“[A]” is displayed.  
If Photo mode is selected,  
“PHOTO” is displayed.  
Note  
In the Photo mode, the Auto  
setting cannot be selected.  
3 If you want to adjust the image  
density manually, press the [  
]
Auto/Photo  
and [  
] keys to select the  
desired setting.  
Tip  
The displays for manually  
selected image densities are  
shown at the right.  
Light (level -4)  
(level -3)  
(level -2)  
(level -1)  
Standard (level 0)  
(level 1)  
(level 2)  
(level 3)  
Dark (level 4)  
4 Make the other necessary settings.  
H
H
“Selecting the Paper” on page 4-4  
“Specifying the Zoom Ratio” on page 4-9  
5 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the number of copies to be made, and then press  
the [Start] key.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.5 Making 2in1 Copies (Available only with FAX3900)  
4
4.5  
Making 2in1 Copies (Available only with FAX3900)  
Two sheets of single-sided documents can be copied onto one double-sided sheet.  
Original  
Copy  
Specifying Settings for 2in1 Copies  
1 Position the original.  
Note  
Be sure to position the  
documents as shown in the  
illustration at the right.  
2 Press the [2in1] key, and then  
check that the indicator lights up.  
2in1  
3 Make the other necessary settings.  
H
H
“Selecting the Paper” on page 4-4  
“Adjusting the Image Density” on page 4-11  
4 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the number of copies to be made, and then press  
the [Start] key.  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.6 Finishing Copies  
4
4.6  
Finishing Copies  
When printing two or more sets, each set can be printed (sorted) in order.  
Note  
In order to sort the printed pages, the Auto Document Feeder is required.  
Finishing methods  
G
Non-Sort:  
The copies are stacked on top of  
each other as they are made.  
<Copying 1 set>  
<Copying 3 sets>  
G
Sort:  
Documents containing multiple  
pages can be printed and  
automatically separated into the  
individual sets.  
<Copying 3 sets>  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.6 Finishing Copies  
4
Specifying Sorting  
1 Load the originals in the Auto Document Feeder.  
2 Press the [Sort] key, and then  
check that the indicator lights up.  
Sort  
Note  
If the Sort indicator is not lit, the  
Non-Sort setting is selected.  
3 Make the other necessary settings.  
H
H
H
“Selecting the Paper” on page 4-4  
“Specifying the Zoom Ratio” on page 4-9  
“Adjusting the Image Density” on page 4-11  
4 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the number of print to be made, and then press the  
[Start] key.  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.6 Finishing Copies  
4
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Faxing  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1 Dialing  
5
This machine is a G3 fax. Faxes can only be sent or received with this machine if  
the recipient’s or sender’s machine complies with the G3 standard.  
5.1  
Dialing  
The recipient’s fax number can be dialed using any of the seven different dialing  
methods described below.  
Using Direct Dialing to communicate with Overseas Destinations:  
If the country code and destination number are entered after the international  
code, you may hear a busy tone during dialing and transmission may not be  
possible. In such cases, press the [Redial/Pause] key twice after entering the  
international code to insert an approx. -6-second pause, and then enter the rest  
of the number. If this still fails to connect the call, perform manual transmission.  
(p. 6-4).  
To fax by entering the fax number directly using the 10-Key Pad  
1 Press the [Fax] key to enter Fax mode.  
2 Load the document into the Auto Document Feeder.  
3 If necessary, change the “Resolution” setting (p. 5-12).  
4 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
fax number of the recipient.  
H
F codes (SUB and SID) can  
also be entered. Refer to  
“Using F codes” on page 6-26.  
Have you entered the number correctly?  
?
§
The fax number can contain a maximum of 30 digits.  
§
§
§
The keys that can be used to enter the fax number are: the number keys (0  
through 9), , #, Space, and Pause  
If the [Redial/Pause] key is pressed while entering the fax number, a 3-  
second pause is added. A pause appears as “P” in the display.  
If you wish to change the fax number, press the [No] key, and then enter the  
correct number.  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1 Dialing  
5
§
If the machine is connected to a PBX line and the outside line access  
number has been specified in the communication settings (p. 7-69), enter  
“#” to dial the outside line access number automatically.  
5 Press the [Start] key to begin scanning and sending the fax.  
To fax using one-touch dialing  
If one-touch dial keys have already been programmed with fax numbers, the fax  
number of a recipient can be specified by pressing just the corresponding one-  
touch dial key.  
For details on programming the one-touch dial keys, refer to “Setting Up One-Touch  
Dialing (“ONE-TOUCH DIAL” function)” on page 7-27.  
1 Press the [Fax] key to enter Fax mode.  
2 Load the document into the Auto Document Feeder.  
3 If necessary, change the “Resolution” setting (p. 5-12).  
4 Press the one-touch dial key programmed with the fax number that you wish to  
send the fax to.  
02/34  
10/42  
18/50  
26/58  
05/37  
13/45  
21/53  
29/61  
06/38  
14/46  
22/54  
30/62  
07/39  
15/47  
23/55  
31/63  
08/40  
16/48  
24/56  
32/64  
01/33  
09/41  
17/49  
25/57  
03/35  
11/43  
19/51  
27/59  
04/36  
12/44  
20/52  
28/60  
05  
06  
07  
08  
02  
01  
09  
17  
25  
03  
04  
10  
18  
26  
11  
19  
27  
12  
20  
28  
13  
21  
29  
14  
22  
30  
15  
23  
31  
16  
24  
32  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1 Dialing  
5
5 Press the [Start] key.  
The machine automatically starts  
scanning the document and  
sending the fax.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1 Dialing  
5
To fax using speed dialing  
If speed dial numbers have already been programmed, the fax number of a  
recipient can be specified quickly by entering the corresponding speed dial number.  
For details on programming speed dial numbers, refer to “Specifying the Setting for  
“SPEED DIAL”” on page 7-31.  
1 Press the [Fax] key to enter Fax mode.  
2 Load the document into the Auto Document Feeder.  
3 If necessary, change the “Resolution” setting (p. 5-12).  
4 Press the [Speed Dial] key, and  
then use the 10-Key Pad to enter  
the 3-digit speed dial number.  
Has the wrong speed dial  
?
number been entered?  
§
Press the [No] key, and then  
enter the correct number.  
5 Press the [Start] key to begin scanning and sending the fax.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1 Dialing  
5
To fax using group dialing  
If one-touch dial keys have already been programmed with a group of fax numbers,  
the fax numbers of all recipients in the group can be specified by pressing just the  
corresponding one-touch dial key.  
For details on programming one-touch dial keys with a group of fax numbers, refer  
to “Specifying the Setting for “GROUP DIAL”” on page 7-35.  
1 Press the [Fax] key to enter Fax mode.  
2 Load the document into the Auto Document Feeder.  
3 If necessary, change the “Resolution” setting (p. 5-12).  
4 Press the one-touch dial key  
programmed with the group of fax  
numbers that you wish to send the  
fax to.  
5 Press the [Start] key.  
The machine automatically starts  
scanning the document and  
sending the fax.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1 Dialing  
5
To fax using chain dialing  
Faxes can be sent to recipients that are specified using any combination of one-  
touch dial keys, speed dial numbers, direct input using the 10-Key Pad, and the  
[Redial] key.  
As an example, the following procedure describes how to specify recipients using  
one-touch keys, then using the10-Key Pad.  
1 Press the [Speaker] key.  
Speaker  
2 Press the desired one-touch key,  
and then press the [Start] key.  
3 After the message “SET DOC.  
FACE UP” appears, use the 10-  
Key Pad to enter the recipient’s fax  
number.  
4 After the message “SET DOC.  
FACE UP” appears, load the  
document into the Auto Document  
Feeder.  
5 Press the [Start] key.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1 Dialing  
5
To fax using program dialing (Available only with FAX3900)  
If one-touch dial keys have already been programmed with fax numbers and a  
transmission/reception function (such as timer transmission or polling reception),  
that function can be carried out by pressing just the corresponding one-touch dial  
key.  
For details on setting program dialing, refer to “Specifying the Setting for  
“PROGRAM DIAL” (Available only with FAX3900)” on page 7-38.  
1 Press the [Fax] key to enter Fax mode.  
2 Load the document into the Auto Document Feeder. (This step is not necessary  
with polling reception.)  
3 If necessary, change the “Resolution” setting (p. 5-12). (This step is not  
necessary with polling reception.)  
4 From the last four one-touch dial  
keys, press the one programmed  
with the desired function.  
64  
H
FAX3900: [61] through [64]  
5 Press the [Start] key.  
The programmed function  
automatically begins.  
Tip  
To cancel a timer transmission, select “CANCEL RESERV.” from the  
“FUNCTION” menu (p. 6-20).  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1 Dialing  
5
To fax using the phone book  
The phone book contains all programmed one-touch dialing and speed dialing  
numbers, allowing you to search for and select the recipient that you wish to send  
the fax to.  
1 Press the [Fax] key to enter Fax mode.  
2 Load the document into the Auto Document Feeder.  
3 If necessary, change the “Resolution” setting (p. 5-12).  
4 Press the [Phone Book] key.  
5 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “LIST” or “SEARCH”,  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
H
If “LIST” was selected:  
The list of programmed one-  
touch dialing and speed dialing  
numbers is displayed. Using  
the [] and [] keys, select  
the desired recipient.  
H
If “SEARCH” was selected:  
A screen appears, allowing  
you to enter the text to be  
searched for. Search for the desired recipient by entering part (or all) of the  
name programmed. For details on performing the search, refer to “To search  
the phone book” on page 5-10.  
6 Press the [Start] key to begin scanning and sending the fax.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1 Dialing  
5
To search the phone book  
1 Press the [Phone Book] key.  
2 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select “SEARCH”, and then press  
the [Yes] key.  
A screen appears, allowing you to  
enter the text to be searched for.  
3 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
first few characters of the name  
programmed for the desired  
recipient.  
H
Enter the name programmed  
in the one-touch dial key or the speed dial number. (For details on entering  
text, refer to “Entering Text” on page 3-18.)  
H
From 1 to 10 characters can be entered.  
4 Press the [Yes] key.  
The number of names beginning  
with the text entered in step 3 is  
displayed.  
To select a recipient from the  
displayed search results, skip to  
step 7.  
Are there no one-touch dialing  
or speed dialing numbers with  
names beginning with the entered text?  
?
§
After “(0)” is displayed, the screen allowing you to enter the search text  
appears.  
5 To narrow down the search results  
even further, press the [Yes] key,  
and then enter more search text.  
6 Press the [Yes] key.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1 Dialing  
5
7 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select the desired recipient.  
H
If the desired recipient name  
does not appear in the search  
results, press the [No] key  
twice to return to the screen allowing you to enter the search text, and then  
try searching for different text.  
8 Press the [Start] key to begin  
scanning and sending the fax.  
To redial the last recipient called  
1 Press the [Fax] key to enter Fax mode.  
2 Load the document into the Auto Document Feeder.  
3 If necessary, change the “Resolution” setting (p. 5-12).  
4 Press the [Redial/Pause] key.  
The fax number of the last  
recipient called is displayed.  
Redial/Pause  
5 Press the [Start] key to begin scanning and sending the fax.  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.2 Transmission Settings  
5
5.2  
Transmission Settings  
Adjusting the Fax Resolution  
Selecting one of the following resolutions to match the type of document to be faxed  
(documents containing a lot of small print, detailed illustrations, or photos) will  
produce a sharper result.  
Document type  
Resolution setting  
Standard  
Documents with normal print  
Documents containing small print, such as newspapers  
Documents containing detailed illustrations  
Fine, Super Fine  
Documents containing text and objects with varying  
shades, such as photos  
Standard + Half Tone,  
Fine + Half Tone  
Documents containing objects with varying shades, such Fine + Half Tone,  
as photos  
Super Fine + Half Tone  
To specify the resolution  
1 Position the document to be faxed.  
2 Press the [Resolution] key on the  
control panel to select the  
resolution mode.  
Resolution  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select the fax resolution, and then  
press the [Yes] key.  
Note  
Depending on the recipient’s fax machine, faxes sent with the Super Fine or  
Super Fine + Half Tone setting may not be sent as specified, and instead are  
sent with the Fine or Half Tone setting.  
If the Half Tone or Super Fine + Half Tone setting is specified, the fax may be  
sent with a decreased resolution depending on the quality of the recipient’s fax  
machine or whether the document size is larger than the paper loaded in the  
recipient’s fax machine.  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.3 Basic Faxing  
5
5.3  
Basic Faxing  
To fax using the Auto Document Feeder  
1 Press the [Fax] key.  
The machine enters Fax mode,  
and the fax screen appears.  
Fax  
2 Load the document to be faxed  
into the Auto Document Feeder.  
H
Adjust the Document Guide  
Plates to fit the size of the  
document.  
H
Load the document face up.  
3 If necessary, change the “Resolution” setting (p. 5-12).  
4 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
fax number of the recipient.  
H
The fax number of a previously  
programmedrecipientcanalso  
be specified. Refer to “Dialing”  
on page 5-2.  
5 Press the [Start] key to begin scanning and sending the fax.  
To stop the transmission, press the [Stop] key.  
Once transmission is finished, a beep is sounded.  
If the fax could not be sent, the transmission result report is printed (p. 7-74).  
H
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.3 Basic Faxing  
5
To cancel the transmission:  
If you wish to cancel a scanned document queued for transmission or a fax  
waiting to be redialed, select “CANCEL RESERV.” from the “FUNCTION” menu  
(p. 6-20).  
About redialing:  
While faxing, if the recipient’s fax machine is busy or does not answer or if, for  
any other reason, such as a transmission error, the fax is not sent correctly, the  
transmission result report is printed.  
If the Memory Becomes Full While Scanning Fax Documents  
If the memory becomes full while scanning a document for memory transmission,  
transmission is cancelled as memory full error.  
With a queued transmission (a fax transmission requested while another fax  
transmission job is being performed) or timer transmission, if the memory becomes  
full while scanning the document, a message appears, allowing you to select  
whether to send just the scanned pages or cancel the transmission. If the  
transmission is canceled, the data for the scanned pages is deleted. After the other  
fax transmission or reception is finished, check the amount of memory available,  
and then try sending the fax again.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.4 Checking Transmission Results  
5
5.4  
Checking Transmission Results  
The transmission result information for a maximum of 60 sent and received  
documents is saved.  
To check the transmission result  
1 Press the [Status] key.  
2 Press the [  
] key.  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
4 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
display the desired transmission  
results to check them.  
H
In the transmission result  
screen, “TX” indicates sent  
faxes, and “RX” indicates  
received ones.  
H
H
If the [No] key is pressed twice  
while the transmission results  
are displayed, the main screen appears.  
To print the transmission result report, press the [Start] key. After the  
transmission result report is printed, the main screen appears.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.4 Checking Transmission Results  
5
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Fax Transmis-  
sion/Reception  
Methods  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
6.1  
Transmission Methods  
Memory Transmission  
With memory transmission, the document is scanned, then stored in the memory  
for transmission (queued transmission).  
Memory transmission is selected as the default transmission mode.  
For details on sending faxes through memory transmission, refer to “Basic Faxing”  
on page 5-13.  
To specify Memory TX  
1 Press the [Fax] key.  
The machine enters Fax mode,  
and the fax screen appears.  
Fax  
2 Load the document to be faxed  
into the Auto Document Feeder.  
H
Adjust the Document Guide  
Plates to fit the size of the  
document.  
H
Load the document face up.  
3 If necessary, change the “Resolution” setting (p. 5-12).  
4 Press the [Memory TX/Auto RX]  
Auto RX  
Memory TX  
key, and then check that the  
Memory TX lamp lights up.  
Note  
If the Memory TX lamp is not  
lit, the direct transmission is  
selected.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
5 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
fax number of the recipient.  
H
The fax number of a previously  
programmedrecipientcanalso  
be specified. Refer to “Dialing”  
on page 5-2.  
6 Press the [Start] key to begin scanning and sending the fax.  
To stop the transmission, press the [Stop] key.  
Once transmission is finished, a beep is sounded.  
H
If the fax could not be sent, the transmission result report is printed (p. 7-74).  
Direct Transmission  
If the Memory TX lamp is not lit, the direct transmission is selected. One page of the  
document at a time can be scanned, according to the transmission status. This  
ensures that even documents with many pages can be sent.  
Note  
If direct transmission is specified while a fax is being sent or received, the  
transmission will be queued.  
With direct transmission, multiple recipients cannot be specified.  
Direct transmission and timer transmission cannot be performed at the same  
time.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
Manual Transmission  
If the machine is connected to a telephone and the same line is used for phoning  
and faxing, the document can simply be sent after talking with the recipient over the  
phone.  
This is useful, for example, if you wish to tell the recipient that you are sending a fax.  
Note  
If the recipient’s fax machine is set to receive faxes automatically (automatic  
reception), a beep is sounded without the recipient answering the phone;  
however, at that time, the telephone cannot be used for talking.  
Manual transmission is possible if a telephone (either purchased or rented) is  
connected to the TEL port of this machine.  
Tip  
Even when pulse dialing is being used, entering “ ” produces signals for tone  
dialing.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
To send a fax manually  
1 Load the document into the Auto Document Feeder.  
2 If necessary, change the “Resolution” setting (p. 5-12).  
3 Pick up the telephone receiver.  
H
Check that the dial tone can be  
heard.  
4 Specify the fax number of the recipient.  
H
H
Use the telephone to dial the fax number.  
The fax number of the recipient can also be specified using the keys in the  
Control Panel of this machine (p. 5-2).  
5 After finishing talking on the phone, the recipient should press the necessary  
key to start receiving the fax.  
Once the recipient’s fax machine is ready, a beep is sounded.  
6 Press the [Start] key to begin  
scanning and sending the fax.  
7 Replace the telephone receiver.  
H
To stop the transmission, press the [Stop] key.  
Tip  
If the [Speaker] key is pressed instead of picking up the telephone receiver, the  
speaker can be used for manual transmission in the same way as described  
above.  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
Batch Transmission  
Multiple documents can be stored in the memory and faxed together at a specified  
time. In order to use this function, the corresponding Utility mode function must first  
be used to program a one-touch dial key with the batch transmission settings  
(transmission time).  
To fax using batch transmission  
1 Load the document into the Auto Document Feeder.  
2 If necessary, change the “Resolution” setting (p. 5-12).  
3 Press the one-touch dial key  
programmed with the desired  
batch transmission settings.  
4 Press the [Start] key to begin scanning the document.  
The document is automatically sent at the specified time.  
Tip  
To cancel a batch transmission, select “CANCEL RESERV.” from the  
“FUNCTION” menu (p. 6-20).  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
Broadcast Transmission  
The same document can be sent to multiple recipients at one time.  
A maximum of recipients can be specified for the same transmission as follows.  
H
H
FAX3900: 274 (64 for one-touch dial, 200 for speed dial, 10 for full dial)  
FAX2900: 142 (32 for one-touch dial, 100 for speed dial, 10 for full dial)  
The recipients can be specified by using the one-touch dial keys, the speed dial  
numbers or group dialing, by selecting from the phone book, or by entering the fax  
number using the 10-Key Pad.  
Tip  
With the result report printed after the transmission is finished, you can check  
whether the fax was sent to all recipients.  
To fax using broadcast transmission  
1 Position the document to be faxed.  
2 If necessary, change the “Resolution” setting (p. 5-12).  
3 Press the [Function] key.  
4 Press the [1] key from the 10-Key  
FAX3900  
Pad.  
or  
Press the [Function] key once to  
select “BROADCAST”, and then  
press the [Yes] key.  
FAX2900  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
5 Specify the fax number of the recipient.  
Repeat the appropriate operations described below until all recipients have  
been specified.  
H
When using the one-touch dial  
keys:  
Press the one-touch dial key  
programmed with the desired  
fax number.  
Press the [Yes] key, and then  
specify the next recipient.  
H
When using the speed dial  
numbers:  
Press the [Speed Dial] key,  
and then use the 10-Key Pad  
to enter the 3-digit speed dial  
number programmed with the  
desired fax number.  
Press the [Yes] key, and then  
specify the next recipient.  
H
H
When using group dialing:  
Press the one-touch dial key programmed with the desired group of fax  
numbers.  
Press the [Yes] key, and then specify the next recipient.  
When selecting from the phone book:  
Press the [Phone Book] key, and then select either “LIST” or “SEARCH” to  
select the desired fax number. (Refer to “To fax using the phone book” on  
page 5-9.)  
Press the [Yes] key, and then specify the next recipient.  
When entering the number  
H
using the 10-Key Pad:  
Enter the fax number of the  
recipient.  
Press the [Yes] key, and then  
specify the next recipient.  
Has the wrong fax number been specified?  
?
§
Press the [No] key to delete the current selection. (This is valid only before  
the recipient is set by pressing the [Yes] key.)  
6 Press the [Start] key.  
A message appears, allowing you to select whether or not to check the  
recipients.  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
7 To check the recipients, press the  
[Yes] key.  
H
If you do not wish to check the  
recipients, skip to step 9.  
8 The recipients specified in step 5  
are displayed in the order that they  
were selected.  
Check the recipient, and then  
press the [Yes] key.  
H
To delete the displayed  
recipient, press the [No] key.  
After all recipients have been  
checked, “Fin.=START” appears  
in the display.  
[1]  
9 Press the [Start] key to begin scanning and sending the fax.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
Timer Transmission  
A document can be scanned and stored in the memory to be sent at a specified  
time. This function is convenient for sending documents with a large number of  
pages at discounted calling times.  
Note  
The time is set for a 24-hour period.  
If the machine is not programmed with the current time (p. 7-76), the fax cannot  
be sent at the specified time.  
A timer transmission cannot be performed at the same time as a direct  
transmission.  
Tip  
Timer transmission can be combined with broadcast transmission, mailbox  
transmission, polling reception, or relay initiation transmission.  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
To fax using timer transmission  
1 Position the document to be faxed.  
2 If necessary, change the “Resolution” setting (p. 5-12).  
3 Press the [Function] key.  
4 Press the [2] key from the 10-Key  
FAX3900  
Pad.  
or  
Press the [Function] key twice to  
select “TIMER TX”, and then press  
the [Yes] key.  
FAX2900  
A screen appears, allowing you to  
specify the transmission time.  
5 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
desired transmission time, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
H
If you wish to correct the time,  
press the [No] key, and then  
enter the correct time.  
6 Specify the fax number of the  
recipient.  
H
Refer to “Dialing” on page 5-2.  
7 Press the [Start] key.  
The machine scans the document, then enters transmission standby mode.  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
Mailbox Transmission  
The fax can be sent to a recipient’s mailbox.  
This is perfect for sending an important document to a specific person.  
Note  
Mailbox transmission is compatible with F code transmission. Machines  
compatible with F codes can be specified as recipients for mailbox  
transmission.  
To fax using mailbox transmission  
1 Position the document to be faxed.  
2 If necessary, change the “Resolution” setting (p. 5-12).  
3 Press the [Function] key.  
4 Press the [3] key from the 10-Key  
FAX3900  
FAX2900  
Pad.  
or  
Press the [Function] key 3 times to  
select “MAILBOX TX”, and then  
press the [Yes] key.  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
5 Specify the recipient, and then  
press the [Yes] key.  
H
Refer to “Dialing” on page 5-2.  
A screen appears, allowing you to  
specify the mailbox ID.  
6 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
mailbox ID of the recipient.  
H
H
H
Enter the mailbox ID (SUB) (20  
digits or less) registered for the  
recipient.  
If the recipient is specified using a one-touch dial key or a speed dial number  
also programmed with a SUB, the SUB is displayed as the mailbox ID. If  
necessary, change the mailbox ID.  
If you wish to correct the mailbox ID, press the [No] key, and then enter the  
new number.  
7 Press the [Yes] key.  
8 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
password.  
H
Enter the password (20 digits  
or less) if a password has been  
set for the recipient’s mailbox.  
H
If you wish to correct the password, press the [No] key, and then enter the  
new number.  
9 Press the [Start] key to begin scanning and sending the fax.  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
Relay Initiation Transmission  
Documents can be sent from this machine (transmitting station) to another fax  
machine (acting as a relay station), which then sends the documents to multiple  
recipients (receiving stations). By relaying the documents through a fax machine  
closer to the remote recipients, the transmission time and cost for the transmitting  
station are reduced.  
In order to fax using relay initiation transmission, a Relay Box must first be  
programmed at the relay station.  
Note  
Relay initiation transmission is compatible with F code transmission.  
Only machines that are compatible with relay broadcast transmission should be  
specified as relay stations. This machine can be specified as a relay station.  
Relay initiation transmission and mailbox transmission cannot be performed at  
the same time.  
In order to fax using relay initiation transmission, a Relay Box ID must first be  
programmed at the relay station (p. 7-53).  
To fax using relay initiation transmission  
1 Position the document to be faxed.  
2 If necessary, change the “Resolution” setting (p. 5-12).  
3 Press the [Function] key.  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
4 Press the [7] key from the 10-Key  
Pad.  
FAX3900  
FAX2900  
or  
Press the [Function] key 7 times to  
select “RELAY INITIATE”, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
5 Specify the relay station, and then  
press the [Yes] key.  
H
Refer to “Dialing” on page 5-2.  
A screen appears, allowing you to  
specify the Relay Box ID.  
6 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
Relay Box ID.  
H
Enter the Relay Box ID (20  
digits or less) programmed at  
the relay station.  
H
If you wish to correct the ID, press the [No] key, and then enter the new  
number.  
7 Press the [Yes] key.  
A screen appears, allowing you to specify the password.  
8 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
password.  
H
Enter the password (20 digits  
or less) if a password has been  
set at the relay station.  
H
If you wish to correct the password, press the [No] key, and then enter the  
new number.  
9 Press the [Start] key to begin scanning and sending the fax.  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
Relay Broadcast Transmission (Available only with FAX3900)  
If this machine is specified as a relay station, it can receive documents sent from  
another fax machine (transmitting station), then send the documents to multiple  
recipients (receiving stations)  
In order to fax using relay broadcast transmission, a Relay Box must first b e  
programmed. A maximum of 10 Relay Boxes can be programmed. For details on  
programming a Relay Box, refer to ““Specifying the Setting for “ RELAY BOX”  
(Available only with FAX3900)” on page 7-53 ”  
Note  
Relay broadcast transmission is compatible with F code transmission.  
In order for the machine to function as a relay station, a 4-digit Relay Box ID must  
first be programmed.  
In order to fax using relay broadcast transmission, the receiving stations (final  
recipients) must be programmed in a Relay Box.  
The document is printed at the receiving stations.  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
Polling Transmission  
Documents scanned and saved in the memory can be retrieved by the recipient.  
Note  
Polling transmission is compatible with F code transmission.  
A maximum of 30 polling transmissions can be programmed.  
If the memory is full, polling transmission cannot be set.  
With polling transmission, the recipient incurs the cost of the call.  
To set up polling transmission  
1 Position the document to be faxed.  
2 If necessary, change the “Resolution” setting (p. 5-12).  
3 Press the [Function] key.  
4 Press the [5] key from the 10-Key  
Pad.  
FAX3900  
FAX2900  
or  
Press the [Function] key 5 times to  
select “POLLING TX”, and then  
press the [Yes] key.  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
5 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “SINGLE” or  
“MULTI”, and then press the [Yes]  
key.  
H
To allow only one polling  
transmission request, then delete the document from the memory, select  
“SINGLE”.  
H
To allow multiple polling transmission requests, select “MULTI”. The  
document is stored in the memory until it has been deleted.  
6 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the 4-  
digit polling ID, and then press the  
[Yes] key.  
H
If you do not wish to set a  
polling ID, skip to step 8.  
H
H
The polling ID can be set to any number between 0000 and 9999.  
If there is only one polling transmission document, it is not necessary to  
specify a polling ID and password.  
7 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the 4-  
digit password.  
H
If you do not wish to set a  
password, continue with step  
8.  
H
The password can be set to any number between 0000 and 9999.  
8 Press the [Start] key.  
The machine scans the document, then enters standby mode.  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
To delete a document from the polling transmission setup  
1 Press the [Function] key.  
2 Press the [5] key from the 10-Key  
FAX3900  
Pad.  
or  
Press the [Function] key 5 times to  
select “POLLING TX”, and then  
press the [Yes] key.  
FAX2900  
If polling transmission has been  
set, a screen appears, allowing  
you to specify the polling ID.  
3 Using the [  
]and [  
press the [Yes] key.  
] keys, select either “SINGLE” or “MULTI”, and then  
4 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
polling ID, and then press the  
[Yes] key.  
5 Press the [No] key to delete from  
the memory the document set for  
polling transmission.  
H
To keep the polling  
transmission setting, press the  
[Yes] key.  
6 Press the [No] key twice to return to the main screen.  
6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
Canceling (Deleting) a Document Queued in the Memory for Transmission  
Of the documents stored in the memory and waiting to be sent, a specific document  
can be selected and deleted.  
To cancel a queued document  
1 Press the [Function] key.  
2 Press the [8] key from the 10-Key  
Pad.  
or  
FAX3900  
Press the [Function] key 8 times to  
select “CANCEL RESERV.”, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
The details (specified  
transmission time/type of  
transmission) of the jobs queued  
in the memory are displayed.  
FAX2900  
Have no jobs been queued in  
the memory?  
?
§
The message “NONE”  
appears.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select the job to be deleted.  
H
The following types of job are  
displayed.  
MEMORY: Memory  
transmission  
B-CAST: Broadcast  
transmission  
TIMER: Timer transmission  
6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1 Transmission Methods  
6
M.B. TX: Mailbox transmission  
POLL-TX: Polling transmission  
POLL-RX: Polling reception  
RELAY: Relay initiation transmission  
FORWARD: Fax forwarding  
H
To check the recipient of the currently displayed transmission job, press the  
] key. After checking, press the [Yes] key to return to the previous  
screen.  
[
4 Press the [Yes] key to delete the  
displayed job.  
“FUNCTION” menu appears in the  
display.  
5 To delete another queued job, repeat steps 2 and 4.  
H
If you are finished deleting jobs, press the [No] key to return to the main  
screen.  
6-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.2 Reception Methods  
6
6.2  
Reception Methods  
Manual Reception  
This machine normally receives faxes automatically. However, if a telephone is  
connected and the same line is used for phoning and faxing, the document can  
simply be received after talking with the caller over the phone.  
Note  
Manual reception is possible if a telephone is connected to the TEL port of this  
machine.  
To receive faxes manually, use the corresponding Utility mode function to select  
the manual reception mode (p. 7-61).  
To receive a fax manually  
1 After the telephone rings, pick up the receiver to talk with the caller.  
2 After talking and the caller’s fax machine sounds long beeps, press the [Start]  
key.  
The machine starts receiving the fax.  
Were the long beeps not sounded by the caller’s fax machine?  
?
§
If the caller’s fax machine is set to send automatically, the long beeps may  
not be sounded.  
3 If the telephone receiver is replaced, the fax reception is finished and the  
machine sounds a beep.  
Memory Reception  
This machine automatically prints faxes that it has received. However, when  
receiving confidential faxes, the received document can be stored in the memory  
and printed at a specified time or when memory reception is turned off.  
Memory reception is set using the corresponding Utility mode function. For details  
on changing the setting, refer to “Specifying the Setting for “MEMORY RX MODE””  
on page 7-61.  
6-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.2 Reception Methods  
6
Mailbox Reception  
If mailbox numbers and F codes (mailbox IDs and passwords) have already been  
programmed on this machine, this function can be used to receive only those faxes  
with an identical mailbox ID and password specified by the caller.  
Since the received fax can only be retrieved after entering the corresponding  
mailbox ID, confidential faxes can safely be sent and received.  
For details on programming the mailboxes, refer to “Specifying the Setting for  
“MAILBOX”” on page 7-50.  
To retrieve a document from a mailbox  
1 Press the [Function] key.  
2 Press the [4] key from the 10-Key  
Pad.  
FAX3900  
FAX2900  
or  
Press the [Function] key 4 times to  
select “PRINT MAILBOX RX”, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
A screen appears, allowing you to  
enter the mailbox ID.  
3 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the 4-  
digit mailbox ID, and then press  
the [Yes] key.  
6-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.2 Reception Methods  
6
Polling Reception  
Using polling reception, documents set up in other fax machines can be received.  
Note  
Polling reception is compatible with F code transmission.  
To receive a fax using polling reception  
1 Press the [Function] key.  
2 Press the [6] key from the 10-Key  
FAX3900  
Pad.  
or  
Press the [Function] key 6 times to  
select “POLLING RX”, and then  
press the [Yes] key.  
FAX2900  
3 Specify the fax number to be  
called.  
H
Refer to step 5 of “To fax using  
broadcast transmission” on  
page 6-7.  
4 To enter the polling ID and  
password, press the [ ] key.  
H
If there is no need to enter a  
polling ID and password, skip  
to step 7.  
6-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.2 Reception Methods  
6
5 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
polling ID (20 digits or less), and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
6 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
password (20 digits or less), and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
7 To specify multiple fax numbers,  
repeat steps 3 through 6.  
H
If you do not wish to specify  
other fax numbers, continue  
with step 8.  
8 Press the [Start] key.  
A message appears, allowing you to select whether or not to check the fax  
numbers to be called.  
9 To check the numbers to be  
called, press the [Yes] key.  
H
If you do not wish to check the  
numbers to be called, skip to  
step 11.  
10 The fax numbers specified in step  
3 are displayed in the order that  
they were selected.  
Check the fax numbers, and then  
press the [Yes] key.  
H
To delete the displayed fax  
number, press the [No] key.  
After all fax numbers have  
been checked, “Fin.=START”  
appears in the display.  
H
11 Press the [Start] key.  
6-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.3 Using F codes  
6
6.3  
Using F codes  
This machine is compatible F code transmissions.  
F codes are mailbox functions, such as “SUB” (sub-addresses), “SEP” (selective  
polling), “SID” and “PWD” (passwords), regulated by the G3 standards of the ITU-  
T (International Telecommunication Union). Mailbox transmission and reception is  
possible only with similar machines compatible with F code transmission. Using the  
10-Key Pad, the following F codes can be set, depending on the use.  
F codes  
G
G
G
SUB:  
Specify when transmitting while using F codes.  
SID:  
Specify when limiting the recipient/caller with a password.  
SEP:  
Specify when calling another fax machine to receive a document set up in it  
(polling reception).  
Note  
The F code function is only available with fax machines that have this function  
as well. Ask your partner, if their machine can process F code transmissions.  
If one-touch dial keys or speed dial numbers are programmed with F codes  
(SUB and SID), the appropriate F code can quickly be transmitted to the  
recipient/caller.  
6-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.3 Using F codes  
6
Using Mailboxes  
Specifying mailboxes:  
Mailboxes can be used if they are set up using the corresponding Utility mode  
function. Refer to “Mailbox Reception” on page 6-23.  
Mailbox  
Fax  
transmission  
(F code)  
Mailbox ID  
Print  
F code mailbox transmission/reception:  
A maximum of 5 mailboxes can be set up. Since a mailbox ID is required in order  
to retrieve documents received in the different mailboxes, confidential faxes can  
safely be sent and received. Refer to “Specifying the Setting for “MAILBOX”” on  
page 7-50.  
If one-touch dial keys or speed dial numbers are programmed with F codes, the  
appropriate F code can quickly be transmitted. Refer to “Mailbox Transmission” on  
page 6-12.  
6-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.3 Using F codes  
6
Specifying F codes  
When sending faxes  
F codes can be specified when the 10-Key Pad is being used to enter the fax  
number of a recipient while sending a fax.  
1 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
fax number of the recipient.  
2 Press the [  
] key, and then use  
the 10-Key Pad to enter the SUB.  
H
H
H
A number up to 20 digits long  
can be entered for the SUB.  
To enter an SID, continue with  
step 3.  
If an SID will not be entered, continue with step 4.  
3 Press the [  
] key, and then use  
the 10-Key Pad to enter the SID.  
H
A number up to 20 digits long  
can be entered for the SID.  
4 Press the [Start] key to begin scanning and sending the fax.  
Programming F codes  
F codes can be specified when programming one-touch dial keys or speed dial  
numbers.  
For details on programming F codes, refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration” on  
page 7-25 in “7 Utility Mode”.  
6-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Using the Utility  
Mode  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.1 Utility Mode  
7
7.1  
Utility Mode  
There are fifteen menus in the Utility mode.  
No. Name  
Description  
1
2
MACHINE SETTING  
Used to specify settings for the machine’s operating environment.  
PAPER SOURCE  
SETUP  
Used to specify the size and type of paper loaded in Tray1. In addition,  
auto tray switching can be enabled for each tray.  
3
ADMIN.MANAGEMENT  
COPY SETTING  
Used to specify setting for the administrator.  
4
Used to specify the default settings for each copy function.  
Used to specify the default setting for each fax function.  
Used to specify the default setting for TX operation.  
Used to specify the default setting for RX operation.  
Used to specify the default setting for communicating environment.  
Used to specify the default setting for each report function.  
5
FAX REGISTRATION  
TX OPERATION  
6
7
RX OPERATION  
COMM. SETTING  
REPORTING  
8
9
10  
INITIAL USER DATA  
Used to specify setting for the initializing user data.  
Available only with FAX3900  
11  
12  
13  
14  
NETWORK SETTING  
E-MAIL SETTING 1  
E-MAIL SETTING 2  
SCAN SETTING  
Available only with FAX3900  
Used to specify e-mail and scan setting.  
Available only with FAX3900  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.2 Specifying the Machine Settings  
7
7.2  
Specifying the Machine Settings  
From the “MACHINE SETTING” menu, various settings for the machine’s operating  
environment can be specified. Refer to the following table for details on each  
function.  
No. Name  
Description  
1
AUTO PANEL RESET  
Whether the Auto Panel Reset function is disable or the time (0.5 min,  
1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4 min, or 5 min) until the machine is reset after  
finishing copying/printing or after performing the last operation can be  
selected. If the Auto Panel Reset function is enabled, all functions are  
automatically reset to their default settings.  
The factory default setting is 1 min.  
2
3
ENERGY SAVE MODE  
DENSITY  
If the machine performs no operations for a set length of time, it will  
automatically enter the Energy Save mode. The length of time until the  
machine enters Energy Save mode can be set between 1 min and  
240 min (in 1 min increments).  
The factory default setting is 15 min.  
The scanning density when using the Auto Document Feeder can be  
adjusted.  
Mode 1: For printing lighter copies of dark documents to avoid  
darkening of copies.  
Mode 2: For printing copies with same density as documents.  
The factory default setting is “Mode 1”.  
4
PRINT DENSITY  
The copy/print density can be adjusted to one of six levels between  
–3 and +3. With the normal print density at 0, choose a smaller number  
for a lighter print or choose a higher number for a darker print.  
The factory default setting is “0” (Normal).  
5
6
7
LCD CONTRAST  
BUZZER VOLUME  
INITIAL MODE  
The brightness of the display can be set to one of four levels between  
–1 and +2.  
The factory default setting is “0” (Normal).  
This function can be used to set the volume of alarms and the beep  
sounded when a key is pressed.  
The manufacturer’s default setting is “LOW”.  
This function can be used to set the mode (Copy mode or Fax mode)  
that the machine starts up in or returns to after the Control Panel is  
reset.  
The manufacturer’s default setting is “COPY”.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.2 Specifying the Machine Settings  
7
Selecting the “MACHINE SETTING” menu  
1 Press the [Utility] key.  
“MACHINE SETTING” appears.  
1
7
Utility  
2 From the 10-Key Pad, press the key ([1] to [7]) for the MACHINE SETTING  
function that you wish to set.  
H
The MACHINE SETTING functions are as follows:  
1 AUTO PANEL RESET  
2 ENERGY SAVE MODE  
3 DENSITY  
4 PRINT DENSITY  
5 LCD CONTRAST  
6 BUZZER VOLUME  
7 INITIAL MODE  
Tip  
To quit changing the machine settings, press the [No] key. “STOP  
SETTING?” appears. Press the [Yes] key to quit changing the settings.  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.2 Specifying the Machine Settings  
7
Specifying the Setting for “AUTO PANEL RESET”  
1 Select the “AUTO PANEL RESET”.  
H
Refer to “Specifying the Machine Settings .  
2 Press the [  
] and [ ] keys to  
select either “ON” or “OFF”, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
If “OFF” was selected, “MACHINE  
SETTING” appears again.  
Note  
If “OFF” was selected, the Auto  
Panel Reset function is  
disabled.  
Auto/Photo  
Yes  
3 Press the [  
] and [  
] keys to  
select the desired time period  
(min).  
Auto/Photo  
4 Press the [Yes] key.  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.2 Specifying the Machine Settings  
7
Specifying the Setting for “ENERGY SAVE MODE”  
1 Select the “ENERGY SAVE MODE”.  
H
Refer to “Specifying the Machine Settings .  
2 Use the 10-Key Pad to specify the  
desired length of time until the  
machine enters Energy Save  
mode.  
Tip  
The timer can be set between  
1 min and 240 min.  
If an incorrect value is entered,  
press the [No] key, and then enter the correct value.  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.2 Specifying the Machine Settings  
7
Specifying the Setting for “DENSITY ”  
1 Select the “DENSITY”.  
H
Refer to “Specifying the Machine Settings .  
2 Press the [  
] and [ ] keys to  
select either “Mode 1” or “Mode 2”.  
Auto/Photo  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.2 Specifying the Machine Settings  
7
Specifying the Setting for “PRINT DENSITY”  
1 Select the “PRINT DENSITY”.  
H
Refer to “Specifying the Machine Settings .  
2 Press the [  
] and [ ] keys to  
select one of the seven print  
density levels between “LIGHT”  
and “DARK”.  
4
Auto/Photo  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.2 Specifying the Machine Settings  
7
Specifying the Setting for “LCD CONTRAST”  
1 Select the “LCD CONTRAST”.  
H
Refer to “Specifying the Machine Settings .  
2 Press the [  
] and [ ] keys to  
select one of the four display  
contrast levels between “LIGHT”  
and “DARK”.  
5
Auto/Photo  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.2 Specifying the Machine Settings  
7
Specifying the Setting for “BUZZER VOLUME”  
1 Select the “BUZZER VOLUME”.  
H
Refer to “Specifying the Machine Settings .  
2 Press the [  
] and [ ] keys to  
set the buzzer volume to “HIGH”,  
“LOW” or “OFF”.  
6
Auto/Photo  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.2 Specifying the Machine Settings  
7
Specifying the Setting for “INITIAL MODE”  
1 Select the “INITIAL MODE”.  
H
Refer to “Specifying the Machine Settings .  
2 Press the [  
] and [ ] keys to  
select either “COPY” or “FAX”.  
7
Auto/Photo  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.3 Setting Up the Paper Sources  
7
7.3  
Setting Up the Paper Sources  
From the “PAPER SOURCE SETUP” menu, the various settings for each paper  
tray can be specified.  
No. Name  
Description  
1
TRAY1 PAPER  
The type and size of paper loaded in Tray1 can be specified.  
The manufacturer’s default settings are “PLAIN” and “Letter L”.  
2
TRAY SETTING  
Whether or not auto tray switching is enabled for each paper tray can  
be specified.  
The factory default setting is “CONTINUOUS”.  
Selecting the “PAPER SOURCE SETUP” menu  
1 Press the [Utility] key twice.  
“PAPER SOURCE SETUP”  
appears.  
Utility  
2 From the 10-Key Pad, press the key ([1] or [2]) for the PAPER SOURCE SETUP  
function that you wish to set.  
H
The PAPER SOURCE SETUP functions are as follows:  
1 TRAY1 PAPER  
2 TRAY SETTING  
Tip  
To quit setting up the paper sources, press the [No] key. “STOP SETTING?”  
appears. Press the [Yes] key to quit changing the settings.  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.3 Setting Up the Paper Sources  
7
Specifying the Setting for “TRAY1 PAPER”  
1 Select the “TRAY1 PAPER”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Paper Sources .  
2 Press the [  
] and [ ] keys  
until the type of paper loaded is  
selected.  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
Auto/Photo  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.3 Setting Up the Paper Sources  
7
Specifying the Setting for “TRAY SETTING”  
1 Select the “TRAY SETTING”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Paper Sources .  
2 Press the [  
] and [  
] keys to  
select a tray.  
Note  
A tray can be selected only if  
the optional Paper Feed  
Cassette is installed.  
Zoom  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
Yes  
4 Press the [  
] and [  
] keys to  
select either “FIXED” (auto tray  
switching disabled) or  
“CONTINUOUS” (auto tray  
switching enabled).  
Auto/Photo  
5 Press the [Yes] key.  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.4 Specifying Administrative Settings (“ADMIN. MANAGEMENT” menu)  
7
7.4  
Specifying Administrative Settings (“ADMIN.  
MANAGEMENT” menu)  
From the “ADMIN. MANAGEMENT” menu, various functions for controlling the use  
of the machine can be set. In order to set an “ADMIN. MANAGEMENT” function,  
the administrator access number must be entered.  
“ADMIN. MANAGEMENT” menu:  
No. ADMIN. MANAGEMENT Description  
1
REMOTE MONITOR  
This function can be used to set whether or not the machine can be  
accessed and the status of the machine can be checked from the  
service center.  
* For details, consult with the service representative.  
Note  
The registering and setup of the administrator access number should be  
performed by the service representative. For details, contact the service  
representative.  
The administrator of this machine should be sure not to lose the administrator  
access number.  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.4 Specifying Administrative Settings (“ADMIN. MANAGEMENT” menu)  
7
To select the “ADMIN. MANAGEMENT” menu  
1 Press the [Utility] key three times.  
“ADMIN. MANAGEMENT”  
appears.  
Utility  
2 Press the [Yes] key.  
3 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the 6-  
digit administrator access number,  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
Tip  
If, at any time, you wish to quit setting an “ADMIN. MANAGEMENT” function,  
press the [No] key. When the message “STOP SETTING?” appears, press the  
[Yes] key to quit.  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.4 Specifying Administrative Settings (“ADMIN. MANAGEMENT” menu)  
7
Specifying the Setting for “REMOTE MONITOR”  
1 Select the “ADMIN.MANAGEMENT”.  
2 Press the [  
] and [  
] keys to  
select either “LIMITED” or “FULL”  
or “OFF”.  
Auto/Photo  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
H
If “LIMITED” or “OFF” was selected, the “ADMIN.MANAGEMENT” menu  
appears again.  
H
If “FULL” was selected, a  
screenappearsallowingyou to  
enter the password. Using the  
10-Key Pad, enter the 4-digit  
password, and then press the  
[Yes] key.  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.5 Specifying Copy Settings  
7
7.5  
Specifying Copy Settings  
When the machine is turned on or the [Panel Reset] key is pressed, the machine is  
automatically reset to its initial mode. By changing the default settings, you can  
change the initial mode. Refer to the following table for the default settings for each  
function.  
No. Name  
Description  
1
PAPER PRIORITY  
The tray that is given priority can be set to either “TRAY1” or “TRAY2”.  
The factory default setting is “TRAY1”.  
2
DENSITY PRIORITY  
The density that is selected when the machine is turned on or the [Panel  
Reset] key is pressed can be set to “AUTO”, “MANUAL” or “PHOTO”.  
The factory default setting is “AUTO”.  
3
4
DENSITY LEVEL (A)  
*(A) : Auto  
The default Auto density level setting can be set to “LIGHT (–1)”,  
“NORMAL (0)” or “DARK (+1)”.  
The factory default setting is “NORMAL (0)”.  
DENSITY LEVEL (M)  
*(M) : Manual  
The default manual density level setting can be set to one of nine levels  
between –4 and +4, with the normal print density at 0.  
If a smaller number (toward –) is selected, the print becomes lighter. If  
a larger number (toward +) is selected, the print becomes darker.  
The factory default setting is “NORMAL (0)”.  
5
OUTPUT PRIORITY  
The finishing setting that is selected when the machine is turned on or  
the [Panel Reset] key is pressed can be set to “NON” or “SORT”.  
The factory default setting is “NON”.  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.5 Specifying Copy Settings  
7
Selecting the “COPY SETTING” menu  
1 Press the [Utility] key four times.  
“COPY SETTING” appears.  
1
5
Utility  
2 From the 10-Key Pad, press the key ([1] to [5]) for the COPY SETTING function  
that you wish to set.  
H
The COPY SETTING functions are as follows:  
1 PAPER PRIORITY  
2 DENSITY PRIORITY  
3 DENSITY LEVEL (A)  
4 DENSITY LEVEL (M)  
5 OUTPUT PRIORITY  
Tip  
To quit changing the copy settings, press the [No] key. “STOP SETTING?”  
appears. Press the [Yes] key to quit changing the settings.  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.5 Specifying Copy Settings  
7
Specifying the Setting for “PAPER PRIORITY”  
1 Select the “COPY SETTING”.  
H
Refer to “Specifying Copy Settings .  
2 Press the [  
] and [ ] keys to  
select either “TRAY1” or “TRAY2”  
Note  
If optional Tray2 is not installed,  
the bottom screen shown at the  
right appears.  
Auto/Photo  
*NOT AVAILABLE*  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
7-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.5 Specifying Copy Settings  
7
Specifying the Setting for “DENSITY PRIORITY”  
1 Select the “DENSITY PRIORITY”.  
H
Refer to “Specifying Copy Settings .  
2 Press the [  
] and [ ] keys to  
select either “AUTO”, “MANUAL”  
or “PHOTO”.  
Auto/Photo  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.5 Specifying Copy Settings  
7
Specifying the Setting for “DENSITY LEVEL (A)”  
1 Select the “DENSITY LEVEL (A)”.  
H
Refer to “Specifying Copy Settings .  
2 Press the [  
] and [ ] keys to  
select one of the three print  
density levels between “LIGHT”  
and “DARK”.  
Auto/Photo  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
7-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.5 Specifying Copy Settings  
7
Specifying the Setting for “DENSITY LEVEL (M)”  
1 Select the “DENSITY LEVEL (M)”.  
H
Refer to “Specifying Copy Settings .  
2 Press the [  
] and [ ] keys to  
select one of the nine print density  
levels between “LIGHT” and  
“DARK”.  
Auto/Photo  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
7-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.5 Specifying Copy Settings  
7
Specifying the Setting for “OUTPUT PRIORITY”  
1 Select the “OUTPUT PRIORITY”.  
H
Refer to “Specifying Copy Settings .  
2 Press the [  
] and [ ] keys to  
select either “NON” or “SORT”.  
Auto/Photo  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
7-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
7.6  
Setting Up the Fax Registration  
From the “FAX REGISTRATION” menu, various settings can be specified in order  
to take advantage of this machine’s many fax functions.  
No. FAX REGISTRATION Characteristic/Description  
1
ONE-TOUCH DIAL  
This function can be used to program one-touch dial keys with fax  
numbers, allowing the recipient to be specified easily and accurately  
without the need to manually enter the number using the 10-Key Pad.  
This dialing method is convenient for programming numbers where faxes  
are frequently sent to.  
2
3
SPEED DIAL  
GROUP DIAL  
This function can be used to program speed dial numbers with fax  
numbers, allowing the recipient to be specified easily and accurately  
without the need to manually enter the number using the 10-Key Pad.  
This function can be used to program a single one-touch dial key with a  
maximum of 50 different fax numbers as one group. Programming a one-  
touch dial key with a group of fax numbers is convenient when  
documents are frequently sent to a set group of multiple recipients.  
4
5
PROGRAM DIAL  
BATCH TX  
This function can be used to program one-touch dial keys with fax  
numbers and a transmission/reception function (such as timer  
transmission or polling reception), allowing that function to be carried out  
by pressing just the corresponding one-touch dial key.  
(Available only with FAX3900)  
This function can be used to specify the batch transmission setting  
(transmission time) for a one-touch dial key programmed with recipient  
fax numbers, so multiple documents can be stored in the memory and  
sent out together at the specified time.  
6
7
MAILBOX  
This function can be used to specify mailbox IDs in order to receive faxes  
with mailbox reception only if the mailbox ID sent by the caller matches  
the mailbox ID set on this machine.  
RELAY BOX  
This function can be used to specify relay box IDs.  
(Available only with FAX3900)  
7-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
Selecting the “FAX REGISTRATION” menu  
1 Press the [Utility] key six times.  
FAX3900  
“FAX REGISTRATION” appears.  
7
1
FAX2900  
5
1
Utility  
2 From the 10-Key Pad, press the key ([1] through [7]) for the “FAX  
REGISTRATION” function that you wish to set.  
H
The “FAX REGISTRATION” functions are as follows:  
1 ONE-TOUCH DIAL  
2 SPEED DIAL  
3 GROUP DIAL  
4 PROGRAM DIAL(Available only with FAX3900)  
5 BATCH TX  
6 MAILBOX  
7 RELAY BOX (Availa(ble only with FAX3900)  
Tip  
If, at any time, you wish to quit programming, changing, or deleting a “FAX  
REGISTRATION” function, press the [No] key. When the message “STOP  
REGISTRATION?” appears, press the [Yes] key to quit.  
7-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
Setting Up One-Touch Dialing (“ONE-TOUCH DIAL” function)  
If the one-touch dial keys are programmed with fax numbers, the recipient can be  
specified easily and accurately without the need to manually enter the number  
using the 10-Key Pad.  
The following is the maximum of numbers that can be programmed.  
FAX3900: 64  
FAX2900: 32  
To program a one-touch dial key  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration .  
2 Press the [1] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “ONE-TOUCH  
DIAL”.  
3 Press the one-touch dial key that  
you wish to program.  
H
For FAX3900, use the [  
]
and [ ] keys to select a one-  
touch dial key between [1-32]  
and [33-64], and then press  
the [Yes] key.  
4 Enter the name of the  
programmed number.  
H
Text up to 20 characters long  
can be entered for the name.  
5 Press the [Yes] key.  
6 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
fax number of the recipient.  
H
The fax number can contain a  
maximum of 30 digits. For  
details on the characters that can be entered. Refer to " To fax by entering  
the fax number directly using the 10-Key Pad on page 5-2"  
To enter a SUB, continue with step 7.  
H
H
If a SUB will not be entered, press the [Yes] key after entering the fax  
7-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
number, and then skip to step 10.  
H
H
If you wish to change the fax number, press the [No] key, and then enter the  
correct number.  
For details on F codes (SUB and SID), refer to “Using F codes .  
7 Press the [  
] key, and then use  
the 10-Key Pad to enter the SUB.  
H
H
H
A number up to 20 digits long  
can be entered for the SUB.  
To enter an SID, continue with  
step 8.  
If an SID will not be entered, skip to step 9.  
8 Press the [  
] key, and then use  
the 10-Key Pad to enter the SID.  
H
A number up to 20 digits long  
can be entered for the SID.  
9 Press the [Yes] key.  
] and [  
10 Using the [  
] keys,  
select the desired modem speed.  
11 Press the [Yes] key.  
The settings are registered. To  
program another one-touch dial  
key, repeat steps 3 through 11.  
12 Press the [No] key to finish  
programming.  
The “FAX REGISTRATION” menu  
appears again.  
7-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
To change/delete a programmed one-touch dial key  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration .  
2 Press the [1] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “ONE-TOUCH  
DIAL”.  
3 Press the one-touch dial key that  
you wish to change or delete, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
H
For FAX3900, use the [  
]
and [ ] keys to select a one-  
touch dial key between [1-32]  
and [33-64], and then press  
the [Yes] key.  
4 Press the [No] key.  
If a one-touch dial key  
H
programmed with a group of  
fax numbers or a transmission/  
reception function is pressed,  
the message shown at the  
right appears. To delete the  
programmed settings, press  
the [No] key. The “FAX  
REGISTRATION” menu  
appears again.  
H
To change the group dialing or  
program dialing settings, refer to page 7-36 and page 7-38.  
5 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “EDIT” or “DELETE”,  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
H
If “EDIT” was selected, the  
name is displayed. (Continue  
with step 6.)  
H
H
If “DELETE” was selected, the settings programmed for the one-touch dial  
key are deleted and the “SELECT REGIST.KEY” screen appears again.  
If you try to change the settings for a one-touch dial number used in group  
7-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
dialing or program dialing, a confirmation message appears, asking whether  
or not to change the corresponding settings programmed in group dialing or  
program dialing.  
If the [Yes] key is pressed, the corresponding settings programmed in group  
dialing or program dialing are changed.  
If the [No] key is pressed, the corresponding settings programmed in group  
dialing or program dialing are deleted.  
H
If a one-touch dial number used in group dialing or program dialing is  
deleted, it is also deleted from the corresponding group dialing or program  
dialing.  
6 Change the name, fax number, F  
codes (SUB and SID), and modem  
speed as desired.  
H
For details on changing the fax  
number, refer to “Entering  
Text .  
H
For details on changing the F codes (SUB and SID) or modem speed, refer  
to p. 7-27.  
7 When you are finished making changes, press the [Yes] key.  
To change the settings of another one-touch dial key, repeat steps 3 through 7.  
8 Press the [No] key to return to the  
“FAX REGISTRATION” menu.  
7-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
Specifying the Setting for “SPEED DIAL”  
If speed dial numbers are programmed with fax numbers, the recipient can be  
specified easily and accurately without the need to manually enter the number  
using the 10-Key Pad.  
The following is the maximum of numbers that can be programmed.  
FAX3900: 200  
FAX2900: 100  
To program a speed dial number  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration .  
2 Press the [2] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “SPEED DIAL”.  
3 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the 3-  
digit speed dial number (ex. 011)  
that you wish to program.  
4 Enter the name of the  
programmed number.  
H
H
For details on entering text,  
refer to “Entering Text .  
Text up to 20 characters long  
can be entered for the name.  
5 Press the [Yes] key.  
6 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
fax number of the recipient.  
H
The fax number can contain a  
maximum of 30 digits.  
For details on the characters  
that can be entered. Refer to “To fax by entering the fax number directly  
using the 10-Key Pad .  
H
H
To enter a SUB, continue with step 7.  
If SUB will not be entered, press the [Yes] key after entering the fax number,  
7-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
and then skip to step 10.  
H
H
If you wish to change the fax number, press the [No] key, and then enter the  
correct number.  
For details on F codes (SUB and SID), refer to “Using F codes .  
7 Press the [  
] key, and then use  
the 10-Key Pad to enter the SUB.  
H
H
H
A number up to 20 digits long  
can be entered for the SUB.  
To enter an SID, continue with  
step 8.  
If SID will not be entered, skip to step 9.  
8 Press the [] key, and then use  
the 10-Key Pad to enter the SID.  
H
A number up to 20 digits long  
can be entered for the SID.  
9 Press the [Yes] key.  
] and [  
10 Using the [  
] keys,  
select the desired modem speed.  
11 Press the [Yes] key.  
The settings are registered.  
To program another speed dial number, repeat steps 3 through 11.  
12 Press the [No] key to finish  
programming.  
The “FAX REGISTRATION” menu  
appears again.  
7-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
To change/delete a programmed speed dial number  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration .  
2 Press the [2] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “SPEED DIAL”.  
3 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
speed dial number that you wish to  
change or delete.  
4 Press the [No] key.  
5 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “EDIT” or “DELETE”,  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
H
If “EDIT” was selected, the  
name is displayed. (Continue  
with step 6.)  
H
H
If “DELETE” was selected, the settings programmed for the speed dial  
number are deleted and the speed dial input screen appears again.  
If you try to change the settings for a speed dial number used in group  
dialing or program dialing, a confirmation message appears, asking whether  
or not to change the corresponding settings programmed in group dialing or  
program dialing.  
If the [Yes] key is pressed, the corresponding settings programmed in group  
dialing or program dialing are changed.  
If the [No] key is pressed, the corresponding settings programmed in group  
dialing or program dialing are deleted.  
H
If a speed dial number used in group dialing or program dialing is deleted, it  
is also deleted from the corresponding group dialing or program dialing.  
7-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
6 Change the fax number, F codes  
(SUB and SID), and modem  
speed as desired.  
H
For details on making  
changes, refer to “Entering  
Text .  
H
For details on changing the F codes (SUB and SID) or modem speed, refer  
to p. 7-27.  
7 When you are finished making changes, press the [Yes] key.  
H
To change the settings of another speed dial number, repeat steps 3  
through 7.  
8 Press the [No] key to return to the  
“FAX REGISTRATION” menu.  
7-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
Specifying the Setting for “GROUP DIAL”  
A single one-touch dial key can be programmed with a maximum of 50 different fax  
numbers as one group. Programming a one-touch dial key with a group of fax  
numbers is convenient when documents are frequently sent to a set group of  
multiple recipients.  
To program a group of fax numbers  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration .  
2 Press the [3] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “GROUP DIAL”.  
3 Press the one-touch dial key that  
you wish to program.  
H
For FAX3900, use the [  
and [ ] keys to select a one-  
touch dial key between [1-32] and [33-64], and then press the [Yes] key.  
]
4 Enter the name of the group, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
H
H
For details on entering text,  
refer to “Entering Text .  
Text up to 20 characters long  
can be entered for the name.  
5 By using the one-touch dial keys  
or the speed dial numbers, specify  
the recipients.  
Do you wish to cancel the  
current selection?  
?
§
Press the [No] key, and then specify the correct recipient.  
6 Press the [Yes] key, and then  
specify another recipient.  
H
H
Repeat steps 5 and 6 until all  
recipients have been specified.  
A maximum of 50 different fax  
7-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
numbers can be specified as one group.  
H
With group dialing, a one-touch dial key programmed with a group can be  
specified. In that case, the number of fax numbers programmed in the  
specified one-touch dial key (group dial key) is added.  
7 When you are finished specifying  
recipients, press the [Start] key.  
The settings are registered.  
To program another group, repeat  
steps 3 through 7.  
8 Press the [No] key to finish  
programming.  
The “FAX REGISTRATION” menu  
appears again.  
To change/delete a programmed group of fax numbers  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration .  
2 Press the [3] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “GROUP DIAL”.  
3 Press the one-touch dial key that  
you wish to change or delete.  
H
For FAX3900, use the [  
and [ ] keys to select a one-  
touch dial key between [1-32] and [33-64], and then press the [Yes] key.  
]
4 Press the [No] key.  
5 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “EDIT” or “DELETE”,  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
H
If “EDIT” was selected, the  
7-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
group name is displayed. (Continue with step 6.)  
H
If “DELETE” was selected, the group dialing settings are deleted and the  
“SELECT REGIST.KEY” screen appears again.  
6 If you wish to change the name of  
the group, enter the new name,  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
H
For details on making  
changes, refer to “Entering  
Text .  
The one-touch dial names are displayed in the order that they were specified.  
7 To delete the displayed recipient,  
press the [No] key.  
To keep the displayed recipient,  
press the [Yes] key.  
The next one-touch dial name is  
displayed.  
8 When you are finished making  
changes, press the [Start] key.  
To change the settings of another  
group of fax numbers, repeat  
steps 3 through 8.  
9 Press the [No] key to return to the  
“FAX REGISTRATION” menu.  
7-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
Specifying the Setting for “PROGRAM DIAL” (Available only with FAX3900)  
If one-touch dial keys have been programmed with fax numbers and a  
transmission/reception function, that function can be carried out by pressing just the  
corresponding one-touch dial key.  
* This function is only available with FAX3900  
Transmission/reception functions that can be programmed:  
G
G
G
G
G
Broadcast transmission  
Timer transmission  
Mailbox transmission  
Polling reception  
Relay initiation transmission  
To set program dialing  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration .  
2 Press the [4] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “PROGRAM DIAL”.  
3 Press the one-touch dial key ([61]  
through [64]) programmedwiththe  
desired function.  
4 From the 10-Key Pad, press the  
key ([1] through [3], [6] or [7]) for  
the desired function.  
H
Functions that can be  
selected:  
1 BROADCAST  
2 TIMER TX  
3 MAILBOX TX  
6 POLLING RX  
7 RELAY INITIATE  
7-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
5 Follow the instructions for the selected function.  
H
H
H
H
H
“To fax using broadcast transmission  
“To fax using timer transmission  
“To fax using mailbox transmission  
“To fax using relay initiation transmission  
“To receive a fax using polling reception  
The settings are registered.  
6 To specify other program dialing settings, repeat steps 3 through 5.  
7 Press the [No] key to finish  
programming.  
The “FAX REGISTRATION” menu  
appears again.  
To change/delete a programmed broadcast transmission  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration .  
2 Press the [4] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “PROGRAM DIAL”.  
3 Press the one-touch dial key ([61]  
through [64]) programmedwith the  
broadcast transmission that you  
wish to change or delete.  
4 Press the [No] key.  
5 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “EDIT” or “DELETE”,  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
H
If “EDIT” was selected, the  
specified recipients are  
7-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
displayed in order. (Continue with step 6.)  
H
If “DELETE” was selected, the program dialing settings are deleted and the  
“SELECT REGIST.KEY” appears again.  
6 To delete the displayed recipient,  
press the [No] key.  
To keep the displayed recipient,  
press the [Yes] key.  
The next recipient is displayed.  
7 When you are finished making  
changes, press the [Start] key.  
H
Other program dialing settings  
can be programmed or  
changed.  
8 Press the [No] key to return to the  
“FAX REGISTRATION” menu.  
To change/delete a programmed timer transmission  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration .  
2 Press the [4] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “PROGRAM DIAL”.  
3 Press the one-touch dial key ([61]  
through [64]) programmedwiththe  
timer transmission that you wish to  
change or delete.  
4 Press the [No] key.  
7-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
5 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “EDIT” or “DELETE”,  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
H
H
If “EDIT” was selected, the  
programmed transmission  
time is displayed. (Continue with step 6.)  
If “DELETE” was selected, the program dialing settings are deleted and the  
“SELECT REGIST.KEY” screen appears again.  
6 To change the transmission time,  
press the [No] key, and then use  
the 10-Key Pad to enter the  
correct time.  
If you do not wish to change the  
transmission time, press the [Yes]  
key.  
The recipient is displayed.  
7 To change the recipient, press the  
[No] key, and then by using the  
one-touch dial keys or the speed  
dial numbers, or by entering the  
fax number using the 10-Key Pad,  
specify a different recipient.  
H
Change the F codes (SUB and SID) as desired.  
8 Press the [Yes] key.  
H
Other program dialing settings can be changed.  
9 Press the [No] key to return to the  
“FAX REGISTRATION” menu.  
To change/delete a programmed mailbox transmission  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION” menu.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration .  
7-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
2 Press the [4] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “PROGRAM DIAL”.  
3 Press the one-touch dial key ([61]  
through [64]) programmedwiththe  
mailbox transmission that you  
wish to change or delete.  
4 Press the [No] key.  
5 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “EDIT” or “DELETE”,  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
H
H
If “EDIT” was selected, the  
specified recipient is  
displayed. (Continue with step 6.)  
If “DELETE” was selected, the program dialing settings are deleted and the  
“SELECT REGIST.KEY” screen appears again.  
6 To change the recipient, press the  
[No] key, and then by using the  
one-touch dial keys or the speed  
dial numbers, or by entering the  
fax number using the 10-Key Pad,  
specify a different recipient.  
7 Press the [Yes] key.  
The mailbox ID is displayed.  
8 To change the mailbox ID, press  
the [No] key, and then use the 10-  
Key Pad to enter the new ID.  
9 Press the [Yes] key.  
The password is displayed.  
7-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
10 To change the password, press  
the [No] key, and then use the 10-  
Key Pad to enter the new  
password.  
11 Press the [Yes] key.  
Other program dialing settings can be changed.  
12 Press the [No] key to return to the  
“FAX REGISTRATION” menu.  
To change/delete a programmed polling reception  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration .  
2 Press the [4] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “PROGRAM DIAL”.  
3 Press the one-touch dial key ([61]  
through [64]) programmedwith the  
polling reception that you wish to  
change or delete.  
4 Press the [No] key.  
5 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “EDIT” or “DELETE”,  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
H
H
If “EDIT” was selected, the  
specified recipients are  
displayed in order. (Continue with step 6.)  
If “DELETE” was selected, the program dialing settings are deleted and the  
“SELECT REGIST.KEY” screen appears again.  
7-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
6 To delete the displayed recipient,  
press the [No] key.  
To keep the displayed recipient,  
press the [Yes] key.  
H
To add a recipient, in the  
screen containing “Fin.=START”, specify a recipient using the one-touch  
dial keys or the speed dial numbers, or by entering a fax number using the  
10-Key Pad.  
The next recipient is displayed.  
7 When you are finished making  
changes, press the [Start] key.  
Other program dialing settings can  
be changed.  
8 Press the [No] key to return to the  
“FAX REGISTRATION” menu.  
To change/delete a programmed relay initiation transmission  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration .  
2 Press the [4] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “PROGRAM DIAL”.  
3 Press the one-touch dial key ([61]  
through [64]) programmedwiththe  
relay initiation transmission that  
you wish to change or delete.  
4 Press the [No] key.  
7-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
5 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “EDIT” or “DELETE”,  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
H
H
If “EDIT” was selected, the  
specified recipient is  
displayed. (Continue with step 6.)  
If “DELETE” was selected, the program dialing settings are deleted and the  
“SELECT REGIST.KEY” screen appears again.  
6 To change the recipient, press the  
[No] key, and then by using the  
one-touch dial keys or the speed  
dial numbers, or by entering the  
fax number using the 10-Key Pad,  
specify a different recipient.  
7 Press the [Yes] key.  
The Relay Box ID is displayed.  
8 To change the Relay Box ID, press  
the [No] key, and then use the 10-  
Key Pad to enter the new ID.  
9 Press the [Yes] key.  
The password is displayed.  
10 To change the password, press  
the [No] key, and then use the 10-  
Key Pad to enter the new  
password.  
11 Press the [Yes] key.  
Other program dialing settings can be changed.  
12 Press the [No] key to return to the  
“FAX REGISTRATION” menu.  
7-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
Specifying the Setting for “BATCH TX”  
If the batch transmission setting (transmission time) is specified for a one-touch dial  
key programmed with recipient fax numbers, multiple documents can be stored in  
the memory and sent out together at the specified time.  
Note  
A one-touch dial key must first be programmed with the fax number of the  
recipient for the batch transmission.  
To set batch transmitting  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration .  
2 For FAX3900: Press the [5] key  
from the 10-Key Pad to select  
“BATCH TX”.  
FAX3900  
H
For FAX2900: Press the [4]  
key from the 10-Key Pad to  
select “BATCH TX”.  
FAX2900  
4
3 Press the one-touch dial key  
programmed with the recipient  
that you wish to send the batch  
transmission fax to.  
H
For FAX3900, use the [  
]
and [ ] keys to select a one-  
ONE-TOUCH DIAL_33__  
touch dial key between [1-32]  
and [33-64], and then press  
the [Yes] key.  
A screen appears, allowing you to specify the transmission time.  
Was the one-touch dial key that was pressed one programmed for group  
?
7-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
dialing, program dialing, or not registered fax number, or not programmed at  
all?  
§
An error message appears.  
4 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
desired transmission time, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
5 Press the [No] key to return to the  
“FAX REGISTRATION” menu.  
To change the batch transmission setting  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration .  
7-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
2 For FAX3900: Press the [5] key  
from the 10-Key Pad, to select  
“BATCH TX”.  
FAX3900  
H
For FAX2900: Press the [4]  
key from the 10-Key Pad, to  
select “BATCH TX  
FAX2900  
4
3 Press the one-touch dial key  
programmed with the batch  
transmission setting that you wish  
to change.  
H
For FAX3900, use the [  
]
and [ ] keys to select a one-  
ONE-TOUCH DIAL_33__  
touch dial key between [1-32]  
and [33-64], and then press the  
[Yes] key.  
4 Press the [No] key, and then use  
the 10-Key Pad, to enter the new  
transmission time.  
5 When you are finished making  
changes, press the [Yes] key.  
6 Press the [No] key to return to the  
“FAX REGISTRATION” menu.  
7-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
To delete the batch transmission setting  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration .  
2 For FAX3900: Press the [5] key  
from the 10-Key Pad, to select  
“BATCH TX”.  
FAX3900  
H
For FAX2900: Press the [4]  
key from the 10-Key Pad, to  
select “BATCH TX  
FAX2900  
4
3 Press the one-touch dial key  
programmed with the batch  
transmission setting that you wish  
to delete.  
H
For FAX3900, use the [  
]
and [ ] keys to select a one-  
ONE-TOUCH DIAL_33__  
touch dial key between [1-32]  
and [33-64], and then press the  
[Yes] key.  
4 Press the [No] key.  
A confirmation message appears,  
asking whether or not to delete the  
batch transmission setting.  
5 Press the [Yes] key.  
The “SELECT REGIST.KEY”  
screen appears again.  
7-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
Specifying the Setting for “MAILBOX”  
Mailbox IDs must first be specified in order to receive faxes with mailbox reception  
only if the mailbox ID sent by the caller matches the mailbox ID set on this machine.  
Note  
A mailbox ID cannot be the same as a Relay Box ID.  
To register a mailbox  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration .  
2 For FAX3900: Press the [6] key  
from the 10-Key Pad to select  
“MAILBOX”.  
FAX3900  
H
For FAX2900: Press the [5]  
key from the 10-Key Pad to  
select “MAILBOX”.  
FAX2900  
5
3 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
mailbox number.  
H
The mailbox number can be  
set to any number between 1  
and 5.  
4 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the 4-  
digit mailbox ID, and then press  
the [Yes] key.  
H
The mailbox ID can be set to  
any number between 0000 and 9999.  
H
If you wish to change the mailbox ID, press the [No] key, and then enter the  
new number.  
7-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
5 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the 4-  
digit password, and then press the  
[Yes] key.  
H
H
H
The password can be set to  
any number between 0000 and 9999.  
If you wish to change the password, press the [No] key, and then enter the  
new password.  
If no password is to be specified, press the [Yes] key without entering  
anything.  
The “FAX REGISTRATION” menu appears again.  
To delete a mailbox  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “FAX REGISTRATION” menu .  
2 For FAX3900: Press the [6] key  
from the 10-Key Pad to select  
“MAILBOX”.  
FAX3900  
H
For FAX2900: Press the [5]  
key from the 10-Key Pad to  
select “MAILBOX”.  
FAX2900  
5
3 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
number of the mailbox that you  
wish to delete.  
4 Press the [No] key.  
A screen appears, allowing you to  
enter the mailbox ID.  
7-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
5 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the 4-  
digit mailbox ID, and then press  
the [Yes] key.  
H
If you wish to change the ID,  
press the [No] key, and then  
enter the new number.  
The specified mailbox is deleted.  
6 Press the [Panel Reset] key.  
The main screen appears again.  
7-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
Specifying the Setting for “ RELAY BOX” (Available only with FAX3900)  
Relay Box IDs must first be specified in order to receive faxes with mailbox  
reception only if the mailbox ID sent by the caller matches the mailbox ID set on this  
machine.  
Note  
A Relay Box ID cannot be the same as a Relay Box ID.  
To register a Relay Box  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration .  
2 For FAX3900: Press the [7] key  
from the 10-Key Pad to select  
“RELAY BOX”.  
7 RELAY BOX  
3 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
Relay Box number.  
RELAY BOX NO. =  
SELECT 0-9  
H
The Relay Box number can be  
set to any number between 0  
and 9.  
4 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the 4-digit Relay Box ID, and then press the [Yes]  
key.  
H
H
The Relay Box ID can be set to any number between 0000 and 9999.  
If you wish to change the Relay Box ID, press the [No] key, and then enter  
the new number.  
5 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the 4-digit password, and then press the [Yes] key.  
H
H
The password can be set to any number between 0000 and 9999.  
If you wish to change the password, press the [No] key, and then enter the  
new password.  
H
If no password is to be specified, press the [Yes] key without entering  
anything.  
The “FAX REGISTRATION” menu appears again.  
7-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Setting Up the Fax Registration  
7
To delete a Relay Box  
1 Select the “FAX REGISTRATION”.  
H
Refer to “Setting Up the Fax Registration .  
2 For FAX3900: Press the [7] key  
from the 10-Key Pad to select  
“RELAY BOX”.  
7 RELAY BOX  
3 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
number of the Relay Box that you  
wish to delete.  
RELAY BOX NO. =  
SELECT 0-9  
4 Press the [No] key.  
A screen appears, allowing you to  
enter the Relay Box ID.  
5 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the 4-digit Relay Box ID, and then press the [Yes]  
key.  
H
If you wish to change the ID, press the [No] key, and then enter the new  
number.  
The specified Relay Box is deleted.  
6 Press the [Panel Reset] key.  
The main screen appears again.  
7-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.7 Setting Up the Transmission  
7
7.7  
Setting Up the Transmission  
From the “TX OPERATION” menu, various functions for sending faxes can be set.  
No. TX OPERATION  
Characteristic/Description  
1
2
3
SCAN CONTRAST  
RESOLUTION  
DEFAULT TX  
This function can be used to set the default scanning contrast level to one  
of five settings between “LIGHT” and “DARK”.  
For dark-colored paper (media), select a setting towards “LIGHT”. For  
faint or colored text, select a setting toward “DARK”.  
This function can be used to set the default scanning resolution (image  
quality) to one of the following: “Standard”, “Fine”, “Super Fine”, “Half  
Tone + Standard”, “Half Tone + Fine” or “Half Tone + Super Fine”.  
The manufacturer’s default setting is “Standard”.  
This function can be used to set the default transmission mode to  
“MEM.TX” or “ADF TX”.  
MEM.TX: memory transmission  
ADF TX: direct transmission  
The manufacturer’s default setting is “MEM.TX”.  
4
HEADER  
This function can be used to set the default setting (“ON” or “OFF”) for  
adding the header (date sent, sender’s name and fax number, etc.) when  
sending faxes.  
The manufacturer’s default setting is “ON”.  
Selecting the “TX OPERATION” menu  
1 Press the [Utility] key six times.  
“TX OPERATION” appears.  
Utility  
2 From the 10-Key Pad, press the key ([1] through [4]) for the “TX OPERATION”  
function that you wish to set.  
H
The “TX OPERATION” functions are as follows:  
1 SCAN CONTRAST  
2 RESOLUTION  
3 DEFAULT TX  
4 HEADER  
7-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.7 Setting Up the Transmission  
7
Tip  
If, at any time, you wish to quit setting a “TX OPERATION” function, press the  
[No] key. When the message “STOP SETTING?” appears, press the [Yes] key  
to quit.  
Specifying the Setting for “SCAN CONTRAST”  
1 Select the “TX OPERATION”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “TX OPERATION” menu .  
2 Press the [1] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “SCAN  
CONTRAST”.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select one of the five settings  
between “LIGHT” and “DARK”,  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
The “TX OPERATION” menu  
appears again.  
Specifying the Setting for “RESOLUTION”  
1 Select the “TX OPERATION”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “TX OPERATION” menu .  
2 Press the [2] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “RESOLUTION”.  
7-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.7 Setting Up the Transmission  
7
3 Using t the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select the desired resolution  
setting, and then press the [Yes]  
key.  
H
The resolution settings appear  
as follows.  
STD: Standard  
FINE: Fine  
S/F: Super Fine  
H/T: Half Tone  
If “H/T” was selected, a screen appears, allowing you to make a detailed setting.  
(Continue with step 4.)  
If any setting other than “H/T” was selected, the “TX OPERATION” menu  
appears again.  
4 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select the desired halftone setting,  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
H
The halftone settings appear  
as follows.  
STD: Standard  
FINE: Fine  
S/F: Super Fine  
The “TX OPERATION” menu appears again.  
Specifying Setting for “DEFAULT TX”  
1 Select the “TX OPERATION”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “TX OPERATION” menu .  
2 Press the [3] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “DEFAULT TX”.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “MEM.TX” or “ADF  
TX”, and then press the [Yes] key.  
The “TX OPERATION” menu  
appears again.  
7-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.7 Setting Up the Transmission  
7
Specifying the Setting for “HEADER”  
1 Select the “TX OPERATION”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “TX OPERATION” menu .  
2 Press the [4] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “HEADER”.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “ON” or “OFF”, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
The “TX OPERATION” menu  
appears again.  
7-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.8 Setting Up the Reception  
7
7.8  
Setting Up the Reception  
From the “RX OPERATION” menu, various functions for receiving faxes can be set.  
No. RX OPERATION  
Characteristic/Description  
1
MEMORY RX MODE  
This function can be used to set whether to allow (“ON”) memory  
reception or not (“OFF”). In case when confidential faxes are being  
received, the received document can be stored in the memory and  
printed at a specified date and time or when memory reception is set to  
“OFF”.  
A password can be set to specify the starting date and time or ending  
date and time of memory reception, or to cancel the function.This setting  
is valid until memory reception is turned off.  
The manufacturer’s default setting is “OFF”.  
2
3
NO. of RINGS  
This function can be used to set the number of rings between 1 and 16  
until the call is answered.  
REDUCTION RX  
This function can be used to set whether documents longer than the  
paper are printed reduced (“ON”), split (“OFF”), or discarded (“CUT”).  
However, when sending a document more than 24 mm (1 inch) longer  
than the paper, “CUT” is not available. (In this case, the document is split.)  
The manufacturer’s default setting is “ON”.  
4
5
RX PRINT  
RX MODE  
This function can be used to set whether the fax is only printed after all  
document pages have been received (“MEMORY RX”) or printing begins  
as soon as the first page of the document is received (“PRINT RX”).  
The manufacturer’s default setting is “MEMORY RX”.  
This function can be used to set the reception mode to automatic  
reception (“AUTO RX”) or manual reception (“MANUAL RX”).  
Automatic reception: Automatically begins receiving after the set number  
of rings.  
Manual reception: Does not automatically receive the fax. Reception  
begins after making a connection by picking up the telephone receiver or  
pressing the [Speaker] key, then pressing the [Start] key.  
The manufacturer’s default setting is “AUTO RX”.  
6
FORWARD  
This function can be used to set whether or not the received document is  
forwarded.  
Forward (“ON”): The received document is forwarded to the specified fax  
number or e-mail address.  
Forward and print (“ON(PRINT)”): The received document is printed by  
this machine at the same time that it is forwarded to the specified fax  
number or e-mail address.  
Do not forward (“OFF”): The document is not forwarded  
The manufacturer’s default setting is “OFF”.  
* Forward the document to an e-mail address is only available with  
FAX3900.  
7
8
9
FOOTER  
This function can be used to set whether or not the reception information  
(date received, number of pages, etc.) is printed at the bottom of each  
received document.  
The manufacturer’s default setting is “OFF”.  
SELECT TRAY  
This function can be used to select which paper tray can be used to  
supply paper when printing received documents or transmission reports.  
(A paper tray that cannot be used for supplying paper can also be  
specified.)  
CLOSED NETWORK This function can be used to set whether or not the fax is received if the  
sender’s fax number does not match the fax number programmed in this  
machine’s one-touch dial keys and speed dials.  
The manufacturer’s default setting is “OFF”.  
7-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.8 Setting Up the Reception  
7
Selecting the “RX OPERATION” menu  
1 Press the [Utility] key seven times.  
“RX OPERATION” appears.  
Utility  
2 From the 10-Key Pad, press the key ([1] through [9]) for the “RX OPERATION”  
function that you wish to set.  
H
The “RX OPERATION” functions are as follows:  
1 MEMORY RX MODE  
2 NO. of RINGS  
3 REDUCTION RX  
4 RX PRINT  
5 RX MODE  
6 FORWARD  
7 FOOTER  
8 SELECT TRAY  
9 CLOSED NETWORK  
Tip  
If, at any time, you wish to quit setting/changing an “RX OPERATION” function,  
press the [No] key. When the message “STOP SETTING?” appears, press the  
[Yes] key to quit.  
To exit the “RX OPERATION” menu, press the [Panel Reset] key. The main  
screen appears again.  
7-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.8 Setting Up the Reception  
7
Specifying the Setting for “MEMORY RX MODE”  
1 Select the “RX OPERATION”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “RX OPERATION” menu .  
2 Press the [1] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “MEMORY RX  
MODE”.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select “ON”, and then press the  
[Yes] key.  
4 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys, to  
select the date for memory  
reception to begin, and then press  
the [Yes] key.  
5 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys, to  
select the date for memory  
reception to end, and then press  
the [Yes] key.  
6 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
time for memory reception to  
begin, and then press the [Yes]  
key.  
H
To specify that memory  
reception stays on from the time that it is set to “ON” until it is manually  
canceled, press the [Yes] without entering a start time. (Skip to step 8.)  
7-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.8 Setting Up the Reception  
7
7 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
time for memory reception to end,  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
8 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the 4-  
digit password used to cancel  
memory reception, and then press  
the [Yes] key.  
H
If no password is to be  
specified, press the [Yes] key without entering anything.  
The “RX OPERATION” menu appears again.  
7-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.8 Setting Up the Reception  
7
To cancel memory reception  
Memory reception is automatically canceled at the specified ending time, and the  
received documents are printed. If no ending time has been set or if you wish to  
cancel memory reception before the ending time, follow the procedure described  
below.  
1 Select the “RX OPERATION”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “RX OPERATION” menu .  
2 Press the [1] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “MEMORY RX  
MODE”.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select “OFF”, and then press the  
[Yes] key.  
H
If a password was specified,  
continue with step 4.  
H
If a password was not specified, all received documents stored in the  
memory are printed, and the “RX OPERATION” menu appears again.  
4 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the 4-  
digit password, and then press the  
[Yes] key.  
All received documents stored in  
the memory are printed, and the  
“RX OPERATION” menu appears again.  
7-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.8 Setting Up the Reception  
7
Specifying the Setting for “NO.of RINGS”  
1 Select the “RX OPERATION”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “RX OPERATION” menu .  
2 Press the [2] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “NO.of RINGS”.  
3 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
desired number of rings, and then  
press the [Yes] key.  
H
The number of rings can be set  
between 1 and 16.  
The “RX OPERATION” menu appears again.  
Specifying the Setting for “REDUCTION RX”  
1 Select the “RX OPERATION”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “RX OPERATION” menu .  
2 Press the [3] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “REDUCTION RX”.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select “ON” (print the document  
reduced), “OFF” (split the printout)  
or “CUT” (discard any excess),  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
The “RX OPERATION” menu appears again.  
7-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.8 Setting Up the Reception  
7
Specifying the Setting for “RX PRINT”  
1 Select the “RX OPERATION”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “RX OPERATION” menu .  
2 Press the [4] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “RX PRINT”.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “MEMORY RX” or  
“PRINT RX”, and then press the  
[Yes] key.  
The “RX OPERATION” menu  
appears again.  
Specifying the Setting for “RX MODE”  
1 Select the “RX OPERATION”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “RX OPERATION” menu .  
2 Press the [5] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “RX MODE”.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “AUTO RX” or  
“MANUAL RX”, and then press the  
[Yes] key.  
The “RX OPERATION” menu  
appears again.  
7-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.8 Setting Up the Reception  
7
Specifying the Setting for “FORWARD”  
1 Select the “RX OPERATION”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “RX OPERATION” menu .  
2 Press the [6] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “FORWARD”.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select “ON”, “ON(PRINT)” or  
“OFF”, and then press the [Yes]  
key.  
H
If “ON” or “ON(PRINT)” was  
selected, a screen appears, allowing you to specify the forwarding location.  
(Continue with step 4.)  
H
If “OFF” was selected, the “RX OPERATION” menu appears again.  
4 Using the one-touch dial keys or  
the speed dial numbers, or by  
entering the fax number using the  
10-Key Pad, specify a fax number,  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
[1]  
The “RX OPERATION” menu appears again.  
Tip  
An e-mail address can be specified as a forwarding location only with FAX3900.  
For details, refer to this Chapter 9 “Internet Fax & Network Scan  
7-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.8 Setting Up the Reception  
7
Specifying the Setting for “FOOTER”  
1 Select the “RX OPERATION”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “RX OPERATION” menu .  
2 Press the [7] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “FOOTER”.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “ON” or “OFF”, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
The “RX OPERATION” menu  
appears again.  
Specifying the Setting for “SELECT TRAY”  
1 Select “RX OPERATION”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “RX OPERATION” menu .  
2 Press the [8] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “SELECT TRAY”.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select a paper tray, and then press  
the [Yes] key.  
4 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “DISABLE” or  
“ENABLE”, and then press the  
[Yes] key.  
The “RX OPERATION” menu  
appears again.  
7-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.8 Setting Up the Reception  
7
Specifying the Setting for “CLOSED NETWORK”  
1 Select the “CLOSED NETWORK”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “RX OPERATION” menu .  
2 Press the [9] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “CLOSED  
NETWORK”.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys, select either “ON” or “OFF”, and then press the  
[Yes] key.  
The “RX OPERATION” menu appears again.  
7-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.9 Setting Up the Communication  
7
7.9  
Setting Up the Communication  
From the “COMM.SETTING” menu, various functions are available for specifying  
communication settings.  
No. COMM.SETTING  
Characteristic/Description  
1
TONE/PULSE  
This function can be used to specify the dialing system. If this function is  
not correctly set to the type of dialing system used, faxes cannot be sent.  
Select the correct setting after checking which type of dialing system is  
used by your telephone line.  
2
3
LINE MONITOR  
PSTN/PBX  
This function can be used to set the volume when monitoring  
communication to “HIGH”, “LOW” or “OFF”.  
The manufacturer’s default setting is “LOW”.  
This function can be used to set whether the connected telephone wiring  
is a public switched telephone network (PSTN) or a private branch  
exchange (PBX).  
For a PBX system, the outside line access number (or extension number)  
must be specified.  
Specifying the Setting for “TONE/PULSE”  
There are two types of telephone dialing systems: tone dialing (PB) and pulse  
dialing (DP10pps or DP20pps). Faxes cannot be sent if this machine is not set to  
the system used by your telephone line. Select the correct setting after checking  
which type of dialing system is used.  
To specify the telephone dialing system  
1 Press the [Utility] key eight times.  
The first screen of the Utility mode  
appears.  
Utility  
2 From the 10-Key Pad, press the  
[1] key.  
7-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.9 Setting Up the Communication  
7
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “TONE” (for tone  
dialing) or “PULSE” (for pulse  
dialing), and then press the [Yes]  
key.  
4 If “PULSE” was selected, select  
either “10pps” or “20pps”, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
The “COMM.SETTING” menu  
appears again.  
Specifying the Setting for “LINE MONITOR”  
1 Press the [Utility] key eight times.  
“COMM. SETTING” appears.  
Utility  
2 From the 10-Key Pad, press the  
[2] key.  
A screen appears, allowing you to  
select the monitoring volume.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select “HIGH”, “LOW” or “OFF”,  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
The “COMM.SETTING” menu  
appears again.  
7-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.9 Setting Up the Communication  
7
Specifying the Setting for “PSTN/PBX”  
The connected wiring system can be set to either PSTN (Public Switched  
Telephone Network) or PBX (Private Branch Exchange).  
For a PBX system, the outside line access number (or extension number) must be  
specified. The outside line access number (or extension number) is programmed in  
the [#] key.  
To specify the telephone wiring system  
1 Press the [Utility] key eight times.  
The first screen of the Utility mode  
appears.  
Utility  
2 From the 10-Key Pad, press the  
[3] key.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “PSTN” (Public  
Switched Telephone Network) or  
“PBX” (Private Branch Exchange),  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
4 If “PBX” was selected, use the 10-  
Key Pad to enter the number that  
should be dialed to access the  
outside line, and then press the  
[Yes] key.  
The “COMM.SETTING” menu appears again.  
7-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.10 Setting Up the Report Output  
7
7.10 Setting Up the Report Output  
From the “REPORTING” menu, various functions are available for specifying which  
reports are automatically printed.  
No. REPORTING  
Characteristic/Description  
1
ACTIVITY REPORT  
Every 60 transmissions/receptions, a report can be printed to show the  
results of the transmissions/receptions. This function can be used to set  
whether the report is printed automatically when the 60th transmission/  
reception is reached.  
The manufacturer’s default setting is “ON”.  
2
RESERV.REPORT  
If multiple recipients are specified for transmission, such as with  
broadcast transmission and polling reception, a report can be printed to  
show specified settings. This function can be used to set whether this  
report is printed automatically.  
The manufacturer’s default setting is “OFF”.  
3
4
TX RESULT REPORT This function can be used to set whether the report showing the result of  
a transmission is printed automatically after the transmission is finished.  
The manufacturer’s default setting is “OFF”.  
RX RESULT  
REPORT  
This function can be used to set whether the report showing the result of  
a reception is printed automatically after mailbox reception is finished. (If  
regular reception is not finished normally, a report will always be printed,  
regardless of the selected setting.)  
The manufacturer’s default setting is “OFF”.  
Selecting the “REPORTING” menu  
1 Press the [Utility] key nine times.  
“REPORTING” appears.  
Utility  
2 From the 10-Key Pad, press the key ([1] through [4]) for the “REPORTING”  
function that you wish to set.  
H
The “REPORTING” functions are as follows:  
1 ACTIVITY REPORT  
2 RESERV.REPORT  
3 TX RESULT REPORT  
4 RX RESULT REPORT  
7-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.10 Setting Up the Report Output  
7
Tip  
If, at any time, you wish to quit setting/changing a “REPORTING” function, press  
the [No] key. When the message “STOP SETTING?” appears, press the [Yes]  
key to quit.  
To exit the “REPORTING” menu, press the [Panel Reset] key. The main screen  
appears again.  
Specifying the Setting for “ACTIVITY REPORT”  
1 Select the “REPORTING”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “REPORTING” menu .  
2 Press the [1] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “ACTIVITY  
REPORT”.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “ON” or “OFF”, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
TheREPORTINGmenuappears  
again.  
Specifying the Setting for “RESERV.REPORT”  
1 Select the “REPORTING”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “REPORTING” menu .  
2 Press the [2] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select  
“RESERV.REPORT”.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “ON” or “OFF”, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
TheREPORTINGmenuappears  
again.  
7-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.10 Setting Up the Report Output  
7
Specifying the Setting for “TX RESULT REPORT”  
1 Select the “REPORTING”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “REPORTING” menu .  
2 Press the [3] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “TX RESULT  
REPORT”.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “ON” or “OFF”, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
TheREPORTINGmenuappears  
again.  
Specifying the Setting for “RX RESULT REPORT”  
1 Select “REPORTING”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “REPORTING” menu .  
2 Press the [4] key from the 10-Key  
Pad to select “RX RESULT  
REPORT”.  
3 Using the [  
] and [  
] keys,  
select either “ON” or “OFF”, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
TheREPORTINGmenuappears  
again.  
7-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.11 Specifying Initial User Data  
7
7.11 Specifying Initial User Data  
Various settings for the machine’s user data can be specified.  
Refer to the following table for details on each function.  
No. Name  
Description  
1
2
3
DATE&TIME  
The date and time for the machine can be specified.  
The fax number for the machine can be specified.  
The fax name for the machine can be specified.  
USER FAX NO.  
USER NAME  
Selecting the “INITIAL USER DATA” menu  
1 Press the [Utility] key ten times.  
“INITIAL USER DATA” appears.  
Utility  
2 From the 10-Key Pad, press the key ([1] through [3]) for the INITIAL USER  
DATA function that you wish to set.  
H
The INITIAL USER DATA functions are as follows:  
1 DATE&TIME  
2 USER FAX NO.  
3 USER NAME  
Tip  
To quit changing initial user data settings, press the [No] key. “STOP  
REGISTRATION?” appears. Press the [Yes] key to quit changing the settings.  
7-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.11 Specifying Initial User Data  
7
Specifying the Setting for “DATE&TIME”  
1 Select “DATE&TIME”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “INITIAL USER DATA” menu .  
2 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
current time and date.  
Enter the settings in the following  
order: hours, minutes, year,  
month, and day.  
3 Press the [Yes] key to display the time zone setting. Press the [] and [] keys  
to select the appropriate time zone.  
4 Press the [Yes] key.  
7-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.11 Specifying Initial User Data  
7
Specifying the Setting for “USER FAX NO.”  
1 Select the “USER FAX NO.”  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “INITIAL USER DATA” menu .  
2 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
fax number.  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
7-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.11 Specifying Initial User Data  
7
Specifying the Setting for “USER NAME”  
1 Select the “USER NAME”.  
H
Refer to “Selecting the “INITIAL USER DATA” menu .  
2 Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the  
user name for the machine.  
H
Each press of the [123/ABC]  
key switches the input mode  
between numbers and letters.  
[1]: Numbers can be typed in.  
[A]: Letters can be typed in.  
123/ABC  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
7-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
When a Message  
Appears  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.1 When the Message “PAPER EMPTY” Appears  
8
8.1  
When the Message “PAPER EMPTY” Appears  
When the currently selected paper tray runs out of paper, the message shown  
below appears, and printing cannot continue.  
Paper tray  
Paper size  
Check the paper tray that has run out of paper, and then supply paper according to  
the following procedures.  
Indicator Paper Tray  
1
2
Tray1  
Tray2  
Bypass Tray  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.1 When the Message “PAPER EMPTY” Appears  
8
Loading Paper into Tray1  
1 Remove the Bypass Tray.  
2 Load the paper in the tray so that  
the front side of the paper (the side  
facing up when the package was  
unwrapped) faces up.  
3 Attach the Bypass Tray in its original position.  
Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray  
1 Load the paper so that the front  
side of the paper (the side facing  
up when the package was  
unwrapped) faces up.  
Note  
The Bypass Tray can be  
loaded with a maximum of 1  
envelope, 1 OHP transparency, 1 card, or 10 sheets of plain paper.  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.1 When the Message “PAPER EMPTY” Appears  
8
Loading Paper into Tray2 (option)  
1 Pull out the drawer for Tray2.  
2 Remove the drawer cover, and  
then press down on the paper-  
lifting plate until it locks into place.  
3 Load the paper into the drawer so  
that the front side of the paper (the  
side facing up when the package  
was unwrapped) faces up.  
4 Attach the drawer cover, and then return the drawer for Tray2 to its original  
position.  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.2 When the Message “TONER EMPTY” Appears  
8
8.2  
When the Message “TONER EMPTY” Appears  
When toner is about to run out, the message shown below appears, indicating that  
the toner is almost empty. When this message appears, replace the Toner  
Cartridge with a new one as soon as possible. If you continue making copies/  
printing, the toner will be emptied, and copies/printing can no longer be made.  
<Toner nearly empty: Copy mode>  
<Toner nearly empty: Fax mode>  
When the toner is empty, the message shown below appears and making copies or  
printing can no longer be performed. Replace the Toner Cartridge.  
<Toner empty>  
CAUTION  
Used Toner Cartridges  
§
In order to prevent the used Toner Cartridge from dirtying anything, keep it in  
the box.  
§
Dispose of the used Toner Cartridge according to your local regulations.  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.2 When the Message “TONER EMPTY” Appears  
8
Note  
Use only the toner that has been manufactured specifically for this machine.  
Never use any other types of toner, as a malfunction could result. For details,  
contact your service representative.  
Before replacing the Toner Cartridge, check that it is of the following type.  
Toner Cartridge TN-110 and 4519-322 on its box  
Do not use a Toner Cartridge of a different type.  
Replacing the Toner Cartridge  
1 Open the Front Cover.  
2 Grab the handle of the Imaging  
Cartridge, and then pull it toward  
you to remove the cartridge.  
Note  
Since the Imaging Cartridge  
can easily be damaged by  
light, exposing the cartridge to light for a long period of time will result in  
decreased image quality.  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.2 When the Message “TONER EMPTY” Appears  
8
3 Move the lever in the direction of  
the arrow to release the lock.  
4 Remove the Toner Cartridge from  
the Drum Cartridge.  
Note  
When separating the Toner Cartridge from the Drum Cartridge, do not tilt the  
cartridge, otherwise toner may spill.  
Do not touch the PC drum under the flap of the Drum Cartridge, otherwise  
decreased image quality may result.  
Do not touch any metal parts of the Drum Cartridge or Toner Cartridge,  
otherwise the units may be damaged by static electricity.  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.2 When the Message “TONER EMPTY” Appears  
8
5 Shake the new Toner Cartridge  
well.  
6 Remove the protective cover from  
the Toner Cartridge.  
Note  
Do not touch the developer  
roller, otherwise decreased  
image quality may result.  
Developer roller  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.2 When the Message “TONER EMPTY” Appears  
8
7 Align the blue parts of the Drum  
Cartridge and Toner Cartridge,  
and then attach them together.  
Blue parts  
8 Align the tab on the Imaging  
Cartridge with the rail in the  
machine, and then install the  
cartridge.  
Note  
Do not push in the Imaging  
Cartridge with excessive force  
if the cartridge is not correctly  
aligned on the rail, otherwise  
the units may be damaged.  
9 Close the Front Cover.  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.3 When the Message “PAPER MISFEED” Appears  
8
8.3  
When the Message “PAPER MISFEED” Appears  
If the message shown below appears during printing and the machine stops  
operating, a paper misfeed has occurred in a paper tray.  
Follow the procedure described below to clear the misfed paper.  
Paper supply  
section  
Clearing a Paper Misfeed in the Paper Trays  
1 Remove all paper from the Bypass  
Tray.  
2 Remove the Bypass Tray.  
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.3 When the Message “PAPER MISFEED” Appears  
8
3 Remove all paper from Tray1.  
Note  
Do not reuse paper that has  
been misfed.  
4 Reload the paper stack in the tray.  
5 Attach the tray removed in step 2.  
6 Reload the paper removed in step 1.  
7 Remove the cover of optional  
Tray2, and then pull out the  
drawer.  
8 Remove all paper from the drawer.  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.3 When the Message “PAPER MISFEED” Appears  
8
9 Reload the paper stack into the  
drawer, and then slide the drawer  
back into the Paper Feed  
Cassette.  
10 Open, then close the Front Cover.  
8-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.4 When the Message “PAPER JAM” Appears  
8
8.4  
When the Message “PAPER JAM” Appears  
If the message shown below appears during printing and the machine stops  
operating, a paper misfeed has occurred in the machine.  
Follow the procedure described below to clear the misfed paper.  
Fusing section  
Separating section  
CAUTION  
The area around the Fusing Unit is extremely hot.  
§
Touching any part other than the paper may result in burns.  
Clearing a Paper Misfeed in the Machine  
1 Open the Front Cover.  
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.4 When the Message “PAPER JAM” Appears  
8
2 Remove the Imaging Cartridge.  
3 Grab both sides of the paper, and  
then pull it out upward.  
4 Grab both sides of the paper, and  
then carefully pull out the sheet of  
paper.  
8-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.4 When the Message “PAPER JAM” Appears  
8
H
Grab both sides of the paper,  
and then carefully pull the  
sheet of paper straight upward.  
H
Grab both sides of the paper,  
and then carefully pull the  
sheet of paper straight  
downward.  
5 Align the tab on the Imaging  
Cartridge with the rail in the  
machine, and then install the  
cartridge.  
Note  
Do not push in the Imaging  
Cartridge with excessive force  
if the cartridge is not correctly  
aligned on the rail, otherwise  
the units may be damaged.  
6 Close the Front Cover.  
Tip  
If “PAPER JAM” remains displayed, even after the misfeed-clearing  
procedure is performed, refer to “What Does Each Message Mean?” on  
page 8-22.  
8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.5 When the Message “ORIGINAL DOC. JAM” Appears  
8
8.5  
When the Message “ORIGINAL DOC. JAM”  
Appears  
If the message shown below appears while scanning an original with the Auto  
Document Feeder and the machine stops operating, a paper misfeed has occurred  
in the Auto Document Feeder.  
Follow the procedure described below to clear the misfed paper.  
Automatic paper supply section  
Clearing a paper misfeed in Auto Document Feeder  
1 Open the Document Feeder  
Cover.  
2 Unload the document from the  
Document Feeder Tray.  
8-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.5 When the Message “ORIGINAL DOC. JAM” Appears  
8
3 Close the Document Feeder Cover.  
4 Load the documents removed in step 2 back into the tray.  
Note  
Replace the document page that was misfed, according to the page number  
indicated in the Display.  
If “ORIGINAL DOC.JAM” remains displayed, even after clearing misfed  
document, perform the misfeed-clearing procedure again.  
8-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.6 When the Message “PAPER SIZE ERROR” Appears  
8
8.6  
When the Message “PAPER SIZE ERROR” Appears  
If the paper size specified for a paper tray differs from the size of the paper loaded  
in the tray, the message shown below appears when paper is fed from that tray.  
Check the message for the paper tray and the paper size to be fed, and then load  
paper according to the corresponding procedure described below.  
For Tray1  
1 Select “TRAY1 PAPER”.  
H
“Selecting the “PAPER SOURCE SETUP” menu” on page 7-12  
2 Press the [1] key of the 10-Key  
Pad, and then specify the correct  
paper type and size.  
H
“Specifying the Setting for  
“TRAY1 PAPER”” on  
page 7-13  
LG  
HL  
8-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.6 When the Message “PAPER SIZE ERROR” Appears  
8
3 Remove the Bypass Tray, and  
then remove all paper from Tray1.  
4 Load the desired paper into the  
tray.  
5 Try performing the print cycle again.  
8-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.6 When the Message “PAPER SIZE ERROR” Appears  
8
For the Bypass Tray  
1 Remove all paper from the Bypass  
Tray.  
2 Load the desired paper into the  
tray.  
3 Select the setting for the type and  
size of paper that is loaded.  
H
“Specifying the Size and Type  
on the Manual Bypass Tray”  
on page 4-5  
LG  
HL  
4 Try performing the print cycle again.  
8-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.7 When the Message “MACHINE TROUBLE” Appears  
8
8.7  
When the Message “MACHINE TROUBLE” Appears  
If the message shown below appears, some machine malfunction has occurred.  
Contact your service representative.  
Note  
When contacting the service representative, be sure to inform them of the  
machine code (error code: C####) that was indicated.  
8-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.8 What Does Each Message Mean?  
8
8.8  
What Does Each Message Mean?  
Message  
Cause  
Action  
*REMOVE PAPER IN BYPASS  
TRAY*  
Paper is loaded in the Bypass  
Tray.  
Remove the paper from the  
Bypass Tray.  
FRONT COVER OPEN  
The Front Cover of the main  
unit is open or not securely  
closed.  
Securely close the Front Cover.  
CLOSE FRONT COVER  
DOC.FEED COVER OPEN  
The Document Feeder Cover is Securely close the Document  
open.  
Feeder Cover.  
CLOSE DOC.FEED COVER  
MEMORY FULL  
The size of the data for the  
scanned document has  
exceeded the capacity of the  
memory.  
Press the [Panel Reset] key, or  
turn the machine off, then on  
again. (The scanned data  
should be cleared from the  
memory.)  
PRESS ANY KEY  
MACHINE TROUBLE  
Some problem occurred in the  
machine.  
Turn the machine off, then on  
again. If the error is still  
displayed, contact your service  
representative.  
SERVICE CALL (C####)  
FUSER COVER OPEN  
The Fuser Cover of the main  
unit is open or not securely  
closed.  
Securely close the Fuser  
Cover.  
CLOSE FUSER COVER  
PAPER JAM  
A paper misfeed occurred.  
Perform the misfeed-clearing  
procedure. (p. 8-16)  
All misfed paper was not  
removed from the main unit.  
OPEN FRONT COVER  
NO SUITABLE PAPER  
The Fuser Cover of the main  
unit is open or not securely  
closed.  
Close the Fuser Cover, then  
open and close the Front  
Cover.  
In Fax mode, plain paper of a  
Load plain paper of the  
size other than Letter, Legal or appropriate size into Tray1 or  
A4 is loaded into the paper tray. the optional Tray2.  
LOAD PAPER (LT)  
INCORRECT T/C TYPE  
Incorrect type of Toner  
Cartridge is installed.  
Install the correct type of Toner  
Cartridge. (p. 8-5)  
Toner Cartridge is not installed. Install the Toner Cartridge.  
(p. 8-6)  
CHANGE T/C  
LINE PROBLEM  
The telephone dialing  
Check the telephone dialing  
system or telephone wiring  
system and use the  
appropriate Utility mode  
function to make the correct  
settings.  
system or telephone wiring  
system are not set correctly.  
The telephone cable is not  
attached correctly.  
(Flashing alternately)  
CHECK LINE  
Correctly connect the  
telephone cable.  
8-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.8 What Does Each Message Mean?  
8
Message  
Cause  
Action  
COMM.ERROR∗  
Communication is not  
Check the transmission results.  
(####)  
possible because of some  
problem in the machine.  
Communication is not  
possible because of a  
problem with the recipient/  
caller’s fax machine.  
REDIAL ALL FAILED∗  
MEM.FULL/TX CANCEL∗  
MEM.FULL/RX CANCEL∗  
All redial attempts failed  
because either the recipient’s  
line is busy or there was no  
answer.  
Check the condition of the  
recipient’s line, and then try  
sending the fax again.  
While sending a fax, the size of  
the data for the scanned image  
has exceeded the capacity of  
the memory.  
Retrieve all received faxes  
stored in the memory.  
Send the fax by direct  
transmission.  
While receiving a fax, the size  
of the data for the received  
image has exceeded the  
capacity of the memory.  
Retrieve all received faxes  
stored in the memory.  
FILE FULL/TX CANCEL  
FILE FULL/RX CANCEL  
HANG UP THE PHONE  
While sending a fax, the  
maximum of number of  
managed memory file is used.  
Retrieve all received faxes  
stored in the memory.  
While receiving a fax, the  
maximum of number of  
managed memory file is used.  
Retrieve all received faxes  
stored in the memory.  
The receiver of the connected  
telephone is lifted.  
Replace the receiver of the  
connected telephone on the  
hook.  
TEXT × 1.00  
1
(While specifying copy settings) Either load paper of the  
The selected paper tray has run specified size into the specified  
ä[A]ü #XXX: EMPTY  
out of paper.  
paper tray, or press the [Paper]  
“#” indicates the paper tray, and key and select a different paper  
“XXX” indicates the paper size. size.  
TEXT × 1.00  
1
A fax error occurred while an  
operation was being performed error condition, and take  
in Copy mode.  
Press the [Fax] key to check the  
ä[A]ü #XXX Fax Err  
appropriate measures.  
TEXT × 1.00  
1
A fax transmission error  
occurred while an operation  
was being performed in Copy  
mode.  
Press the [Fax] key to check the  
error condition, and take  
appropriate measures.  
ä[A]ü#XXComm.Err  
8-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.8 What Does Each Message Mean?  
8
Internet Fax/Network Scan  
Message  
Cause  
Remedy  
*COMM.ERROR*  
XXXX Server  
Communication is not  
possible because of some  
problem in the copier or due  
to the condition of the  
network or server.  
Check the transmission results.  
Consult with the network  
administrator.  
*CANNOT CONNECT*  
XXXX Server  
A connection to the server  
cannot be established.  
Check that the Ethernet cable is  
correctly connected. (p. 9-14)  
Check the settings for the  
functions on the “E-MAIL  
SETTING 1”, “E-MAIL SETTING  
2”, and “NETWORK SETTING”  
menus. (p. 9-16)  
Consult with the network  
administrator.  
*CANNOT GET IP*  
XXXX Server  
The IP address could not be Consult with the network  
assigned by the DNS or  
DHCP server.  
administrator.  
*DISCONNECT*  
XXXX Server  
The connection to the server Consult with the network  
was cut. administrator.  
*WRONG PASSWORD*  
XXXX Server  
The password is incorrect, so For a POP3 server, check the  
the copier could not log onto setting for the functions on the “E-  
the server.  
MAIL SETTING 2” menu. (p. 9-28)  
Consult with the network  
administrator.  
*RECEIVE WRONG DATA*  
XXXX Server  
An e-mail message that  
cannot be printed by this  
copier was received. (For a  
file attachment in a format  
other than TIFF-F)  
Ask the sender to send a TIFF-F  
file or text in the correct format.  
*MEM.FULL/TX CANCEL*  
While sending an e-mail  
message, the size of the data messages stored in the memory.  
for the scanned image has  
Retrieve all received e-mail  
exceeded the capacity of the  
memory.  
*MEM.FULL/RX CANCEL*  
XXXX Server  
While receiving an e-mail  
message, the size of the data messages stored in the memory.  
for the scanned image has  
Retrieve all received e-mail  
exceeded the capacity of the  
memory.  
*FILE FULL/TX CANCEL*  
While sending an e-mail  
message, the maximum  
number of managed memory  
files is used.  
Retrieve all received e-mail  
messages stored in the memory.  
*FILE FULL/RX CANCEL*  
XXXX Server  
While receiving an e-mail  
message, the maximum  
number of managed memory  
files is used.  
Retrieve all received e-mail  
messages stored in the memory.  
*SERVER MEMORY FULL*  
SMTP Server  
The memory of the SMTP  
server has become full while administrator.  
sending an e-mail message.  
Consult with the network  
8-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.8 What Does Each Message Mean?  
8
Message  
Cause  
Remedy  
*FTP SERVER ERROR*  
While uploading scan data,  
the data could not be  
correctly uploaded to the FTP  
server.  
Consult your network  
administrator for details.  
MACHINE TROUBLE  
Some problem occurred in  
the copier.  
Turn the copier off, then on again.  
If the error is still displayed, contact  
your service representative.  
SERVICE CALL (C####)  
8-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.9 When Incorrect Copies Are Produced  
8
8.9  
When Incorrect Copies Are Produced  
* If the problem is not corrected even after the operations described above are  
performed, contact your service representative.  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Action  
The printed output is too light.  
The density level for the Auto  
setting is set to “LIGHT”.  
Adjust the setting for DENSITY  
LEVEL (A) in the Utility mode.  
(p. 7-22)  
Otherwise, cancel the “Auto”  
density setting, and then  
manually select the desired  
density setting. (p. 4-11)  
The density level is set to  
“LIGHT”.  
Press the [Ö ] key, and then  
select a darker print density.  
(p. 4-11)  
Does the message “TONER  
EMPTY” or “TONER NEAR  
EMPTY” appear in the Display?  
Replace the Toner Cartridge  
with a new one. (p. 8-6)  
The paper is damp.  
Change the paper.  
The printed output is too dark.  
The density level for the Auto  
setting is set to “DARK”.  
Adjust the setting for DENSITY  
LEVEL (A) in the Utility mode.  
(p. 7-22)  
Otherwise, cancel the “Auto”  
density setting, and then  
manually select the desired  
density setting. (p. 4-11)  
Ö
The density level is set to  
“DARK”.  
Press the [ ] key, and then  
select a lighter print density.  
(p. 4-11)  
The printed output is blurry.  
The paper is damp.  
Change the paper.  
8-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.9 When Incorrect Copies Are Produced  
8
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Action  
The printed output has dark specks The original is 2-sided.  
or spots.  
If a thin double-sided document  
is being printed, the information  
on the back side may be  
reproduced in the print. Press  
Ö
the [ ] key and select a lighter  
print density.  
The Drum Cartridge has  
reached the end of its service  
life.  
Contact your service  
representative.  
The printed output has lines.  
The printed output on the copy is not The paper guides are not  
Slide the paper guides against  
the edges of the paper stack.  
aligned properly.  
pressed up against the paper  
stack in the tray.  
The paper has an excessive  
curl.  
Smooth out curls in the paper  
and reload the paper stack in  
the tray.  
The printed page is curled.  
The paper that was used curls Remove the paper from the  
easily (as with recycled paper). paper tray, turn it over, and  
then load it again.  
Change the paper.  
The edge of the printed output is  
dirty.  
You have selected paper of a  
size larger than the original  
(when the zoom ratio is full  
size).  
Select paper that is the same  
size as the document.  
Otherwise, enlarge the print to  
the selected paper size.  
The original is not placed in the Select the same paper size as  
correct position (when the  
zoom ratio is full size).  
the original. Or, reload the  
paper in the same direction as  
the original.  
The reduction ratio selected  
Select a zoom ratio that adjusts  
does not match the paper size the copy size to the size of the  
(when the copy is made at a  
manually adjusted reduction  
ratio).  
selected paper. Otherwise,  
make a reduced copy with a  
zoom ratio that matches the  
paper size.  
8-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.10 The machine is not functioning as designed  
8
8.10 The machine is not functioning as designed  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Action  
Nothing appears in the Display.  
Is only the [Start] key lit green? The Energy Save mode is  
enabled. Press any key on the  
Control Panel to cancel Energy  
Save mode.  
Has the machine been turned  
on?  
Check that the power cord is  
firmly connected and that the |  
(on) side of the Power Switch  
has been pressed.  
Is the contrast of the Display too From the “MACHINE  
light?  
SETTING” menu of the Utility  
mode, adjust the Display to the  
correct contrast. Refer to  
“Specifying the Setting for “LCD  
CONTRAST”” on page 7-9.  
The [Start] key indicator does not  
light up green.  
The machine has just been  
turned on and is warming up.  
It takes the machine less than  
25 seconds to be ready to make  
copies after it has been turned  
on.  
Please wait.  
The machine does not operate  
when it is turned on.  
The power cord is left  
unplugged.  
Plug the power cord into the  
power outlet.  
The room’s circuit breaker is  
open.  
Close the room’s circuit  
breaker.  
*
If the problem is not corrected even after the operations described are performed, turn off the machine,  
unplug its power cord, and then contact the service representative.  
8-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.11 When Faxing Is Not Performed Correctly  
8
8.11 When Faxing Is Not Performed Correctly  
Faxes Cannot Be Sent  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Remedy  
The document was scanned at The document is not  
Adjust the Document Guide  
Plates for the size of the  
document.  
an angle.  
positioned correctly.  
The fax received by the  
recipient is not clear.  
The document is not  
positioned correctly.  
Position the document  
correctly.  
The text in the document is Adjust the scanning  
too faint. contrast. (p. 7-56)  
There is a problem with the Check that this machine  
telephone connection or  
with the recipient’s fax  
machine.  
can make clean copies. If it  
can, try sending the fax  
again.  
The fax received by the  
recipient is blank.  
The document was sent  
with the front side facing  
down (while using the Auto then try sending the fax  
Load the document with the  
front side facing up, and  
Document Feeder).  
again.  
Faxes cannot be sent  
automatically.  
The fax number is wrong.  
Check the fax number.  
Check the number.  
A number specifically for  
telephone calls is being  
dialed.  
There is a problem with the Contact the recipient.  
recipient’s fax machine (it is  
out of paper, it is not set to  
receive faxes automatically,  
it is turned off, etc.).  
8-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.11 When Faxing Is Not Performed Correctly  
8
Faxes Cannot Be Received  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Remedy  
The received fax is not clear.  
Paper that does not meet  
specifications has been  
used.  
Use paper that meets  
specifications. (p. 3-21)  
The paper is damp.  
The toner is empty.  
Replace the paper. (p. 8-3 )  
Replace the Toner  
Cartridge with a new one.  
(p. 8-6)  
There is a problem with the Check that the machine can  
telephone connection or  
with the caller’s fax  
machine.  
make clean copies. If it can,  
have the caller send the fax  
again.  
The received fax is blank.  
The toner is empty.  
Replace the Toner  
Cartridge with a new one.  
(p. 8-6)  
The caller sent the back of  
the fax pages.  
Contact the caller.  
Faxes cannot be received  
automatically.  
The machine is set to  
receive faxes manually.  
Set the machine to  
automatic reception.  
(p. 7-61)  
The memory is full.  
Load paper if it is empty,  
and then print the faxes  
stored in the memory.  
Some error occurred.  
Follow the instructions in  
any messages that appear  
on the Display. (p. 8-22)  
Black streaks appear through  
the print.  
There is a problem with the Check that the machine can  
telephone connection or  
with the caller’s fax  
machine.  
make clean print. If it can,  
have the caller send the fax  
again.  
8-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.11 When Faxing Is Not Performed Correctly  
8
Calls Cannot Be Sent  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Remedy  
Nothing can be heard from the The cord from the  
Correctly connect the  
connected telephone.  
telephone is not connected telephone cord to the main  
correctly to the main unit.  
unit.  
The telephone cord from  
the wall jack is not  
connected correctly to the  
main unit.  
Correctly connect the  
telephone cord from the  
wall jack to the main unit.  
Transmitting.  
Check again after the  
transmission is finished.  
After dialing, the ringing cannot The telephone dialing  
Correctly set the telephone  
dialing system. (p. 7-69)  
be heard.  
system is not set correctly.  
After the [Speaker] key is  
pressed, it is difficult to hear the too low.  
recipient/caller’s voice.  
The monitoring volume is  
Increase the monitoring  
volume. (p. 7-70)  
The ringing of the telephone is The ringer volume of the  
Adjust the ringer volume of  
too low (loud).  
connected telephone is set the connected telephone.  
too low (loud).  
8-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.11 When Faxing Is Not Performed Correctly  
8
8-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
Internet Fax &  
Network Scan  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.1 Overview  
9
9.1  
Overview  
The scan function makes it possible to easily convert paper documents  
into electronic documents and file them in an electronic filing system that  
makes it much easier to access the information. The scanned images  
(scan data) are stored in TIFF or PDF format and can be sent to  
computers over a network.  
Scan data can be sent in the following ways. Select the method best  
suited to your network environment or purpose.  
Tip  
Internet fax and network scanning functions are available only  
with FAX3900.  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.1 Overview  
9
9.1.1 Scan to E-mail  
G
The scan data is sent as TIFF or PDF e-mail attachments to other  
computers on the network or over the Internet.  
G
This method requires that a mail server is available over the network.  
Mail server  
Client computer  
Intranet  
Internet  
Mail server  
Client computer  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.1 Overview  
9
9.1.2 Scan to Server (FTP)  
G
The scan data is uploaded, as TIFF or PDF files, to the specified folder  
on an FTP server.  
G
G
This method requires that an FTP server is available over the network.  
The scan data can also be sent to an FTP server that is accessed via  
a proxy server.  
FTP server  
Intranet  
Internet  
FTP server  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.1 Overview  
9
G
In addition, the system can be set to send, to as many as 10 specified  
recipients, notification of the FTP server address where the data was  
uploaded.  
FTP server  
FTP server  
Internet  
Client computer  
Intranet  
Internet  
Mail server  
Client computer  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.1 Overview  
9
9.1.3 Internet Faxing  
G
Unlike fax machines that use telephone lines, Internet faxing can send  
and receive fax images over the Internet. The Internet fax service uses  
Internet e-mail services to send and receive fax images. An Internet  
fax service transmits scanned images as TIFF-F files attached to e-  
mail messages and sends them to the desired Internet fax destination.  
The Internet fax service that receives the e-mail messages then prints  
the files when they are received.  
G
Since Internet fax uses e-mail to send the fax images, Internet faxes  
can also be sent to e-mail addresses as well as other Internet fax  
services. The person that receives the Internet fax will receive the fax  
images as e-mail attachments using their e-mail software.  
Mail server  
Client computer  
Internet fax  
terminal  
Intranet  
Internet  
Mail server  
Client computer  
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.1 Overview  
9
9.1.4 System Requirements  
The following system environment is required in order to use the Internet  
fax or network scanning functions.  
Tip  
TCP/IP connections must be enabled in order to use the Internet fax  
or network scanning functions.  
The copier must be connected to a phone line in order to use functions  
that require a phone line connection.  
Scan to Server  
(FTP)  
Scan to E-mail  
Internet Faxing  
Required  
Mail server (SMTP  
server)  
FTP server (The  
enclosed  
PageScope Light  
Cabinet can be  
used as a simple  
FTP server.)  
Mail server (POP3  
server, SMTP server)  
environment for  
image data  
transmission  
In order to use e-  
mail notifications,  
a mail server  
(SMTP server) is  
required.  
Required  
E-mail client  
FTP client  
Internet fax terminal  
environment for  
image data  
importing  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.1 Overview  
9
9.1.5 Control Panel Parts and Their Functions  
9.1.5.1 Names of Control Panel Parts and Their Functions  
Resolution  
Speaker  
Phone Book  
Redial/Pause  
Speed Dial  
Auto RX  
Memory TX  
Function  
08/40  
16/48  
24/56  
32/64  
02/34  
10/42  
18/50  
26/58  
05/37  
13/45  
21/53  
29/61  
06/38  
14/46  
22/54  
30/62  
07/39  
01/33  
09/41  
17/49  
25/57  
03/35  
11/43  
19/51  
27/59  
04/36  
12/44  
15/47  
23/55  
31/63  
20/52  
28/60  
No.  
Part Name  
Function  
1
[Resolution] key  
Used to select the image quality (transmission resolution)  
for the Internet fax function.  
2
3
[Phone Book] key  
Used to search for and display addresses programmed  
using the one-touch dial, group dial, and speed dial  
functions.  
[Function] key  
Used to switch between different function setting screens.  
“Sending a Document to Multiple Destinations (Broadcast  
Transmission)” on page 9-75, “Sending a Document at a  
Specified Time (Timer Transmission)” on page 9-76,  
“Canceling (Deleting) a Document Queued in the Memory  
for Transmission” on page 6-20, “Receiving Internet  
Faxes” on page 9-78  
4
5
[Speed Dial] key  
Used to specify destinations previously programmed with a  
3-digit number.  
One-touch dial keys  
Used to specify previously programmed destinations.  
9-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.1 Overview  
9
14  
11 12 13  
16 17  
19  
20  
8
Error  
Fax  
Scan  
DEF  
@
ABC  
2
1
4
3
Copy  
Yes  
No  
123/ABC  
MNO  
GHI  
JKL  
5
6
Panel Reset  
Stop  
C
WXYZ  
9
PORS  
7
TUV  
2in1  
Utility  
Sort  
Printer  
Status  
Paper  
8
Start  
Auto/Photo  
Zoom  
0
#
*
6
7
9
10  
15  
18  
No.  
Part Name  
Function  
6
and  
keys  
Used to specify the scanning mode when using the  
network scanning functions. Used to select the item to the  
left or right of the current position in setting screens.  
[Auto/Photo] key  
7
8
[Utility] key  
Used to display the different Utility mode screens.  
MACHINE SETTING, FAX REGISTRATION, E-MAIL  
SETTING 1, E-MAIL SETTING 2, NETWORK SETTING,  
SCAN SETTING  
Display  
Displays setting details, such as e-mail addresses, setting  
menus, and error messages.  
9
[Status] key  
Used to check the status of a transmission.  
10  
and  
[Zoom] key  
keys  
Used to select the item above or below the current position  
in setting screens or lists.  
11  
[No/C] (clear) key  
Used to delete characters or numbers that have been  
entered in a setting field.Used to return to the previous  
screen.  
12  
13  
14  
[Yes] key  
Used to confirm settings.  
“Error” indicator  
10-key pad  
Lights up if an error has occurred.  
Used to enter setting values. Used to enter numbers/  
characters. E-mail addresses and other text can be  
entered with these keys.  
Used to enter speed dial numbers.  
15  
[Stop] key  
Used to stop the scanning of documents, stop sending or  
receiving, or to stop printing.  
16  
17  
[123/ABC] key  
[Scan] key  
Used to switch between number and character entry.  
Used to switch between different scan modes. This key  
lights up in green to indicate that the copier is in Scan mode.  
18  
19  
[Start] key  
[Fax] key  
Used to start scanning, or send e-mail messages/files.  
Used to send scan data or receive e-mail messages when  
using the Internet fax function.  
20  
[Panel Reset] key  
Used to cancel all current operations.  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.1 Overview  
9
9.1.6 Using PageScope Light  
9.1.6.1 What is PageScope Light?  
PageScope Light is a device control utility program provided by the HTTP  
server built into the network interface card. This utility can be used with a  
Web browser as an interface for remotely controlling the copier and  
network interface card.  
HTTP server  
Access  
Here are some examples of the types of tasks that can be performed with  
PageScope Light.  
G
Setting/changing network settings  
TCP/IP settings  
H
9-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.1 Overview  
9
H
H
H
SMTP settings  
POP3 settings  
FTP settings  
G
Adding/changing e-mail addresses  
H
H
H
H
One-touch dial settings  
Speed dial settings  
Group dial settings  
Speed dial settings (adding an FTP server address)  
9.1.6.2 System Requirements  
PageScope Light can be used in the following system environments.  
Operating system  
Browser  
Windows 98, Windows Me,!Windows 2000,  
Windows XP  
Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or later  
Netscape Navigator 4 or later  
9.1.6.3 Accessing PageScope Light  
Note  
In order to use PageScope Light, an IP address, subnet mask, and  
gateway setting must already be specified from the control panel of the  
copier. For information on specifying these settings, refer to “Network  
Settings” on page 9-21.  
PageScope Light is accessed directly using a Web browser.  
1 Start up your Web browser.  
2 Enter the IP address of the copier into the “Address” box, and then  
press the [Enter] key.  
http://<copier_IP_address>/  
H
(Example) If the copier IP address is 192.168.0.100, enter:  
http://192.168.0.100/  
3 The PageScope Light screen appears.  
9.1.6.4 Using PageScope Light  
PageScope Light is used in the same way as other Internet Web pages.  
Click links in the page to jump to that page, and use the [Back] and [Next]  
buttons to navigate through pages that have already been loaded.  
9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.1 Overview  
9
9.1.6.5 About the Screen Layout  
The following screen appears when you access PageScope Light.  
Note  
Screen images used in this chapter may differ from the actual screen  
display. They are also subject to change without notice.  
1
3
4
2
5
1
2
Status display  
Displays the current status of the copier.  
Administrator password  
Enter the administrator password to log in to the  
Administrator mode.  
3
4
5
Tabs  
Used to select the various categories of settings.  
Menu  
Used to select various setting items or display information.  
Displays the details for the item selected from the menu.  
Information/setting  
display  
9-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.1 Overview  
9
9.1.6.6 Logging In as an Administrator  
Some of the settings available in PageScope Light can only be changed  
by an administrator. These settings are only displayed when you log in to  
the Administrator mode.  
Logging in to Administrator Mode  
1 Enter the administrator password in the “Admin Password” box at the  
left of the screen.  
2 Click the [Login] button to log in to the Administrator mode.  
3 To log out, click the [Logout] button.  
Note  
The default password for Administrator mode is “sysadm”.  
Be sure to change the administrator password before using  
Administrator mode.  
If no operations are performed for 10 minutes, PageScope Light  
automatically logs out.  
The copier cannot be used when using PageScope Light while logged  
in to the with Administrator mode.  
9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
9.2  
Getting Ready  
9.2.1 Connecting to a LAN Network  
This copier supports the TCP/IP protocol used by LAN networks. In order  
to use this protocol, the copier must be connected to the LAN with a  
network cable.  
Connecting the LAN Cable  
Insert the connector on one end of the LAN cable into the network port  
(marked LAN) on the back of the copier, and the connector on the other  
end to an open port on a network hub.  
Tip  
The network port is on the back of the copier.  
Use a Category 5 or 5E LAN cable.  
The LAN cable is not included.  
9-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
About the LEDs  
Green LED : This LED ligths up when the network cable is connected  
correctly. If this LED is not lit, check the connection  
again, even if the copier appears to be connected  
correctly. If this LED is not lit when both ends are  
connected correctly, the network cable may be  
damaged.  
Orange LED : This LED blinks when data is being transferred.  
9-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
9.2.2 Specifying the Network Settings  
Depending on the network environment in which the copier is located,  
there may be some restrictions on the network functions that the copier  
can use. Specify the network settings to suit the functions and  
environment required for your configuration.  
The network settings can be specified from the control panel of the copier  
or using the Administrator mode of PageScope Light.  
9.2.2.1 Quick Overview of the Network Settings  
Setting  
Scan  
Internet  
Faxing  
Scanto  
Server  
Function  
Description  
to E-  
mail  
Control  
Panel  
PageScope  
Light  
2: Required; -: Unnecessary; : As necessary  
2 : Possible  
- : Not possible  
NETWORK SETTINGS  
IP ADDRESS This function is  
used to specify the  
IP address for the  
copier.  
2*2  
2*2  
2*2  
2
2
Consult your  
network  
administrator for  
information about  
the IP address to  
use.  
SUBNET  
MASK  
This function is  
used to specify the  
subnetmaskvalue  
for the network.  
Consult your  
network  
2*2  
2*2  
2*2  
2
2
2
2
administrator for  
details.  
GATEWAY  
This function is  
used to specify the  
default gateway  
(IP address) of a  
router on the  
network.  
2*2  
2*2  
2*2  
Consult your  
network  
administrator for  
details.  
9-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
Setting  
Scan  
to E-  
mail  
Internet  
Faxing  
Scanto  
Server  
Function  
Description  
Control  
Panel  
PageScope  
Light  
DNS  
CONFIG.  
This function is  
used to enable or  
disable the DNS  
(Domain Name  
System) setting. If  
there is a DNS  
server on your  
network, enter the  
IP address of the  
DNS server.  
2
2
*If the DNS server  
is located within  
yourlocalnetwork,  
select “ENABLE”.  
If you are using  
the DNS server of  
an Internet service  
provider (ISP) or  
some other DNS  
server located  
outside your local  
network, select  
“DISABLE”.  
Consult your  
network  
administrator for  
details.  
E-MAIL SETTING 1  
SENDER  
NAME  
This function is  
used to specify the  
sender’s name.  
2
2
2
2
*1  
2
2
2
2
E-MAIL  
ADDRESS  
This function is  
used to specify the  
e-mail address of  
the sender.  
*1  
Consult your  
network  
administrator for  
details.  
SMTP  
SERVER  
This function is  
used to specify the  
IP address or host  
name of an SMTP  
server.  
2
2
2*3  
2
2
Consult your  
network  
administrator for  
details.  
9-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
Setting  
Scan  
to E-  
mail  
Internet  
Faxing  
Scanto  
Server  
Function  
Description  
Control  
Panel  
PageScope  
Light  
SMTP PORT This function is  
2
2
*1  
2
2
NO.  
used to specify the  
port number (1 to  
65535) for the  
SMTP server.  
Consult your  
network  
administrator for  
details.  
SMTP  
TIMEOUT  
This function is  
used to specify the  
length of time (in  
seconds) until the  
connection to the  
SMTP server  
2
2
2
2
*1  
2
2
2
2
times out. (30 to  
300 seconds)  
TEXT  
INSERT  
This function is  
used to specify  
whether or not text  
explaining that an  
image has been  
attached to the e-  
mail message is  
inserted when  
*1  
scan data is sent  
as an e-mail  
attachment.  
DEFAULT  
SUBJECT  
This function is  
2
2
2
*1  
2
2
2
2
used to specify the  
defaultsubjectline  
when sending  
scan data as an e-  
mail attachment.  
E-MAIL SETTING 2  
POP3  
SERVER  
This function is  
-
-
used to specify the  
IP address or host  
name of the POP3  
server.  
Consult your  
network  
administrator for  
details.  
POP3 PORT This function is  
2
-
-
2
2
NO.  
used to specify the  
port number (1 to  
65535) for the  
POP3 server.  
Consult your  
network  
administrator for  
details.  
9-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
Setting  
Scan  
to E-  
mail  
Internet  
Faxing  
Scanto  
Server  
Function  
Description  
Control  
Panel  
PageScope  
Light  
POP3  
TIMEOUT  
This function is  
used to specify the  
length of time (in  
seconds) until the  
connection to the  
POP3 server  
2
-
-
2
2
times out. (30 to  
300 seconds)  
POP3  
ACCOUNT  
This function is  
used to specify the  
account name  
used to log in to  
the POP3 server.  
Consult your  
network  
2
-
-
2
2
administrator for  
details.  
POP3  
This function is  
2
-
-
2
2
PASSWORD used to specify the  
password  
associated with  
the account name  
used to log in to  
the POP3 server.  
Consult your  
network  
administrator for  
details.  
AUTO  
This function is  
2
-
-
2
2
RECEPTION used to specify the  
time interval (in  
minutes) for  
checking e-mail  
when the Auto  
Reception  
function is  
enabled. ( OFF, 1  
to 60 minutes)  
REPLY  
ADDRESS  
This function is  
used to specify the  
e-mail address  
where  
2
-
-
2
2
notifications are  
sent if an error  
occurs while an  
Internet fax is  
being received.  
9-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
Setting  
Scan  
to E-  
mail  
Internet  
Faxing  
Scanto  
Server  
Function  
Description  
Control  
Panel  
PageScope  
Light  
HEADER  
PRINT  
This function is  
used to specify  
whether or not to  
print header  
2
-
-
2
2
information when  
printing e-mail  
messages that  
have been  
received.  
PageScope Light Administrator mode: “Scan” tab  
File  
Destination  
This function is  
used to specify the  
FTP destination  
used for Scan to  
Server (FTP)  
-
-
2
-
2
operations. It is  
used to specify the  
IP address of the  
FTP server, the  
directory, and  
other settings.  
9-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
Setting  
Scan  
to E-  
mail  
Internet  
Faxing  
Scanto  
Server  
Function  
Description  
Control  
Panel  
PageScope  
Light  
PageScope Light Administrator mode: “Network” tab  
FTP This function is  
-
-
-
2
Configuration used to specify the  
IP address for the  
proxy server of an  
FTP server.  
*1: Required if notification of the URL is sent by e-mail.  
*2: Can also be assigned automatically by the DHCP server.  
*3: If there is no SMTP server available over the network, enter “0.0.0.0”  
as the IP address.  
9.2.2.2 Using the Control Panel To Specify Settings  
Network Settings  
These settings can be specified from the “NETWORK SETTINGS” menu  
in Utility mode.  
This section describes how to specify settings for the following functions.  
G
G
G
G
IP ADDRESS  
SUBNET MASK  
GATEWAY  
DNS CONFIG.  
Note  
Be sure to consult your network administrator before specifying any of  
the network settings.  
Tip  
If you wish to cancel a change to a network setting before applying it,  
press the [No] key. Press the [Yes] key after the message “STOP  
SETTING?” appears.  
9-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
Setting the IP Address  
1 Press the [Utility] key.  
The Utility mode menu appears.  
2 Press the  
or  
key until  
“NETWORK SETTING” appears.  
3 Press the [1] key on the 10-key pad  
to select “IP ADDRESS”.  
4 Press the  
and  
keys to  
select “AUTO” or “SPECIFY”, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
H
If “AUTO” is selected, the IP address is automatically acquired  
from the DHCP server. The NETWORK SETTING screen appears.  
If “SPECIFY” is selected, the screen for entering the IP address  
appears. (Go to step 5.)  
H
Note  
“AUTO” is only available if there is a DHCP server on the network.  
When “AUTO” is selected, there is no need to set the subnet mask  
or gateway setting.  
If a fixed IP address is being used, “IP Address in NVRAM” must  
be selected in PageScope Light. Select this option from the screen  
displayed after clicking “TCP/IP Configuration” in the menu on the  
“Network” tab.  
5 Using the 10-key pad, enter the IP  
address for the copier.  
H
The illustration at the right is an  
example of an IP address.  
Consult your network administrator for details about these settings.  
9-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
6 Press the [Yes] key.  
9
The NETWORK SETTING screen appears. To register settings in the  
copier, the copier must be turned off, then on again.  
7 While the NETWORK SETTING screen is displayed, press the [No]  
key or [Panel Reset] key so that the message “PLEASE RE-START  
POWER SUPPLY OFF/ON” appears.  
8 Set the power switch of the copier to “2”, then “1” to restart the copier.  
Specifying the Subnet Mask  
1 From the “NETWORK SETTING”  
menu in the Utility mode, press the  
[2] key on the 10-key pad to select  
“SUBNET MASK”.  
2 Using the 10-key pad, enter the  
subnet mask value.  
H
The illustration at the right is an  
example of a subnet mask  
address. Consult your network administrator for details about  
these settings.  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
The NETWORK SETTING screen appears. To register settings in the  
copier, the copier must be turned off, then on again.  
4 While the NETWORK SETTING screen is displayed, press the [No]  
key or [Panel Reset] key so that the message “PLEASE RE-START  
POWER SUPPLY OFF/ON” appears.  
5 Set the power switch of the copier to “2”, then “1” to restart the copier.  
Specifying the (Default) Gateway  
1 From the “NETWORK SETTING”  
menu in the Utility mode, press the  
[3] key on the 10-key pad to select  
“GATEWAY”.  
9-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
2 Using the 10-key pad, enter the IP  
address for the gateway.  
H
The illustration at the right is an  
example of a gateway address.  
Consult your network administrator for details about these settings.  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
The NETWORK SETTING screen appears. To register settings in the  
copier, the copier must be turned off, then on again.  
4 While the NETWORK SETTING screen is displayed, press the [No]  
key or [Panel Reset] key so that the message “PLEASE RE-START  
POWER SUPPLY OFF/ON” appears.  
5 Set the power switch of the copier to “2”, then “1” to restart the copier.  
Specifying the DNS Configuration  
1 From the “NETWORK SETTING”  
menu in the Utility mode, press the  
[4] key on the 10-key pad to select  
“DNS CONFIG”.  
2 Press the  
and  
keys to  
select “DISABLE” or “ENABLE”,  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
H
If “DISABLE” is selected, the NETWORK SETTING screen  
appears.  
H
If “ENABLE” is selected, the screen for entering the IP address of  
the DNS server appears. (Go to step 3.)  
3 Using the 10-key pad, enter the IP  
address for the DNS server.  
4 Press the [Yes] key.  
The NETWORK SETTING screen appears. To register settings in the  
copier, the copier must be turned off, then on again.  
5 While the NETWORK SETTING screen is displayed, press the [No]  
key or [Panel Reset] key so that the message “PLEASE RE-START  
POWER SUPPLY OFF/ON” appears.  
9-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
6 Set the power switch for the copier to “2”, then “1” to restart the copier.  
Specifying the E-mail Settings (“E-MAIL SETTING 1” Menu)  
The settings for the E-MAIL SETTING 1 functions are specified from the  
“E-MAIL SETTING 1” menu in Utility mode.  
This section describes how to specify settings for the following functions.  
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
SENDER NAME  
E-MAIL ADDRESS  
SMTP SERVER  
SMTP PORT NO.  
SMTP TIMEOUT  
TEXT INSERT  
DEFAULT SUBJECT  
Tip  
If you wish to cancel a change to a setting before applying it, press the  
[No] key. Press the [Yes] key after the message “STOP SETTING?”  
appears.  
Registering the Sender’s Name  
1 Press the [Utility] key. The Utility  
mode menu screen appears.  
2 Press the  
or  
key until “E-  
MAIL SETTING 1” appears.  
3 Press the [1] key on the 10-key pad  
to select “SENDER NAME”.  
4 Enter the sender name.  
H
For information on entering text,  
refer to “Entering Text” on  
[
]
page 3-18.  
H
Up to 20 characters can be entered for the sender name.  
9-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
5 Press the [Yes] key.  
The E-MAIL SETTING 1 screen appears again.  
Registering the E-mail Address of the Sender  
1 From the “E-MAIL SETTING 1”  
menu in the Utility mode, press the  
[2] key on the 10-key pad to select  
“E-MAIL ADDRESS”.  
2 Enter the e-mail address of the  
copier.  
[
]
H
For information on entering text,  
refer to “Entering Text” on page 3-18.  
H
H
Up to 64 characters can be entered for the sender address.  
Consult your network administrator for information about the e-mail  
address to use.  
H
If you do not receive e-mail on the copier, enter the e-mail address  
of the administrator.  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
The E-MAIL SETTING 1 screen appears again.  
Specifying the SMTP Server Address  
1 From the “E-MAIL SETTING 1”  
menu in the Utility mode, press the  
[3] key on the 10-key pad to select  
“SMTP SERVER”.  
2 Enter the IP address or host name  
of the SMTP server.  
[
]
H
For information on entering text,  
refer to “Entering Text” on page 3-18.  
Up to 64 characters can be entered for the host name.  
The DNS settings must have been specified before the host name  
for the SMTP server can be specified.  
H
H
H
The illustration at the right is an example of a host name. Consult  
your network administrator for details about this setting.  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
The E-MAIL SETTING 1 screen appears again.  
9-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
Specifying the SMTP Port Number (“SMTP PORT NO.” Function)  
1 From the “E-MAIL SETTING 1”  
menu in the Utility mode, press the  
[4] key on the 10-key pad to select  
“SMTP PORT NO.”.  
2 Enter the port number for the SMTP  
server.  
H
For information on entering text,  
refer to “Entering Text” on page 3-18.  
The port number can be set between 1 and 65535.  
Normally, port number 25 is used.  
H
H
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
The E-MAIL SETTING 1 screen appears again.  
Specifying the Timeout Period for the SMTP Server (“SMTP  
TIMEOUT” Function)  
1 From the “E-MAIL SETTING 1”  
menu in the Utility mode, press the  
[5] key on the 10-key pad to select  
“SMTP TIMEOUT”.  
2 Enter the timeout period (in  
)
(
e
seconds).  
H
H
For information on entering text,  
refer to “Entering Text” on page 3-18.  
The timeout period can be set between 30 and 300 seconds.  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
The E-MAIL SETTING 1 screen appears again.  
Specifying Whether or Not To Insert a Text Description (“TEXT  
INSERT” Function)  
1 From the “E-MAIL SETTING 1”  
menu in the Utility mode, press the  
[6] key on the 10-key pad to select  
“TEXT INSERT”.  
9-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
2 Press the  
and  
keys to  
select “ON” or “OFF”, and then  
press the [Yes] key.  
The E-MAIL SETTING 1 screen  
appears again.  
Specifying the Default Subject Line  
1 From the “E-MAIL SETTING 1”  
menu in the Utility mode, press the  
[7] key on the 10-key pad to select  
“DEFAULT SUBJECT”.  
2 Enter text for the default subject  
line.  
[
]
H
H
For information on entering text,  
refer to “Entering Text” on page 3-18.  
Up to 20 characters can be entered for the default subject.  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
The E-MAIL SETTING 1 screen appears again.  
Specifying Other E-mail Settings (“E-MAIL SETTING 2” Menu)  
The settings for the E-MAIL SETTING 2 functions are specified from the  
“E-MAIL SETTING 2” menu in Utility mode.  
This section describes how to specify settings for the following functions.  
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
POP3 SERVER  
POP3 PORT NO.  
POP3 TIMEOUT  
POP3 ACCOUNT  
POP3 PASSWORD  
AUTO RECEPTION  
REPLY ADDRESS  
HEADER PRINT  
Tip  
If you wish to cancel a change to a setting before applying it, press the  
[No] key. Press the [Yes] key after the message “STOP SETTING?”  
appears.  
9-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
Specifying the POP3 Server Address  
1 Press the [Utility] key. The Utility  
mode menu appears.  
2 Press the  
or  
key until “E-  
MAIL SETTING 2” appears.  
3 Press the [1] key on the 10-key pad  
to select “POP3 SERVER”.  
4 Enter the IP address or host name  
of the POP3 server.  
[
]
H
For information on entering text,  
refer to “Entering Text” on page 3-18.  
Up to 64 characters can be entered for the host name.  
The DNS settings must have been specified before the host name  
for the POP3 server can be specified.  
H
H
H
The illustration at the right is an example of a host name. Consult  
your network administrator for details about this setting.  
5 Press the [Yes] key.  
The E-MAIL SETTING 2 screen appears.  
Specifying the POP3 Port Number (“POP3 PORT NO.” Function)  
1 From the “E-MAIL SETTING 2”  
menu in the Utility mode, press the  
[2] key on the 10-key pad to select  
“POP3 PORT NO.”.  
2 Enter the port number for the POP3  
server.  
H
For information on entering text,  
refer to “Entering Text” on page 3-18.  
The port number can be set between 1 and 65535.  
Normally, port number 110 is used.  
H
H
9-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
The E-MAIL SETTING 2 screen appears again.  
Specifying the Timeout Period for the POP3 Server (“POP3  
TIMEOUT” Function)  
1 From the “E-MAIL SETTING 2”  
menu in the Utility mode, press the  
[3] key on the 10-key pad to select  
“POP3 TIMEOUT”.  
2 Enter the timeout period (in  
)
(
e
seconds).  
H
H
For information on entering text,  
refer to “Entering Text” on page 3-18.  
The timeout period can be set between 30 and 300 seconds.  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
The E-MAIL SETTING 2 screen appears again.  
Specifying the POP3 Account Name  
1 From the “E-MAIL SETTING 2”  
menu in the Utility mode, press the  
[4] key on the 10-key pad to select  
“POP3 ACCOUNT”.  
2 Enter the account name.  
H
For information on entering text,  
refer to “Entering Text” on  
page 3-18.  
H
Up to 64 characters can be entered for the account name.  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
The E-MAIL SETTING 2 screen appears again.  
Specifying the POP3 Password  
1 From the “E-MAIL SETTING 2”  
menu in the Utility mode, press the  
[5] key on the 10-key pad to select  
“POP3 PASSWORD”.  
9-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
2 Enter the password.  
9
H
For information on entering text,  
refer to “Entering Text” on  
page 3-18.  
H
H
Up to 32 characters can be entered for the password.  
The illustration at the right is an example of the password display.  
Consult your network administrator for details about this setting.  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
The E-MAIL SETTING 2 screen appears again.  
Setting Up Auto Reception  
1 From the “E-MAIL SETTING 2”  
menu in the Utility mode, press the  
[6] key on the 10-key pad to select  
“AUTO RECEPTION”.  
2 Press the  
and  
keys to  
select “ON” or “OFF”, and then  
press the [Yes] key.  
H
If “ON” is selected, the screen used to specify the time interval for  
checking e-mail appears. (Go to step 3.)  
H
If “OFF” is selected, the E-MAIL SETTING 2 screen appears again.  
3 Specify the time interval (in  
minutes) for checking e-mail.  
H
The time interval for  
automatically checking for new e-mail messages can be set  
between 1 minute and 60 minutes.  
4 Press the [Yes] key.  
The E-MAIL SETTING 2 screen appears again.  
9-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
Specifying the Address for Result Notifications  
1 From the “E-MAIL SETTING 2”  
menu in the Utility mode, press the  
[7] key on the 10-key pad to select  
“REPLY ADDRESS”.  
2 Enter the e-mail address to which  
error notifications should be sent.  
[
]
H
For information on entering text,  
refer to “Entering Text” on page 3-18.  
H
H
Up to 64 characters can be entered for the reply address.  
Normally, the reply address is set to the e-mail address of the  
administrator.  
3 Press the [Yes] key.  
The E-MAIL SETTING 2 screen appears again.  
Specifying Whether or Not To Print Header Information (“HEADER  
PRINT” Function)  
1 From the “E-MAIL SETTING 2”  
menu in the Utility mode, press the  
[8] key on the 10-key pad to select  
“HEADER PRINT”.  
2 Press the  
and  
keys to  
select “ON” or “OFF”, and then  
press the [Yes] key. The E-MAIL  
SETTING 2 screen appears again.  
9.2.2.3 Specifying Settings Using PageScope Light  
The network settings can be specified using PageScope Light.  
1 Start up PageScope Light.  
H
Refer to “Using PageScope Light” on page 9-10.  
2 Log in to the Administrator mode.  
3 To specify the settings using PageScope Light, click the appropriate  
tab and specify the desired settings, and then click the [Apply] button.  
H
If the settings on the Network tab are modified, they are only  
enabled after the [Apply] button is clicked, then the [Reset] button  
next to “NIC and Printer Controller Reset” on the “System” tab is  
9-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
clicked after the message “Update Successful” has appeared.  
“Network” tab  
TCP/IP Configuration  
TCP/IP Configuration  
Function  
Description  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
This function is used to specify the IP address for the copier.  
This function is used to specify the subnet mask used to access  
the network.  
Default Gateway  
Base Port Number  
DHCP (APIPA)  
This function is used to specify the default gateway used to  
access the network.  
This function is used to specify the port number for RAW  
printing.  
Select this function if the IP address is automatically assigned  
by a DHCP server or APIPA.  
IP Address in NVRAM  
Select this function if a fixed IP address is used.  
9-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
SMTP & POP3 Configuration  
SMTP Configuration  
Function  
Description  
SMTP Server Address  
This function is used to specify the IP address or host name of  
an SMTP server. (Up to 64 characters)  
Default Subject for E-mail  
Attachment  
This function is used to specify the default subject line when  
sending scan data as an e-mail attachment. (Up to 20  
characters)  
Sender name  
This function is used to specify the sender’s name when  
sending scan data as an e-mail attachment. (Up to 20  
characters)  
E-Mail Address  
This function is used to specify the sender’s e-mail address  
when sending scan data as an e-mail attachment. (Up to 64  
characters)  
Always enter the e-mail address of the sender, not that of the  
copier itself.  
Port Number  
This function is used to specify the port number for the SMTP  
server. Normally, port number 25 is used. (1 to 65535)  
9-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
Function  
Description  
SMTP Server Timeout  
This function is used to specify the length of time (30 to 300  
seconds) until the connection to the SMTP server times out.  
POP3 Configuration  
Function  
Description  
POP3 Server Address  
This function is used to specify the IP address or host name of  
the POP3 server. (Up to 64 characters)  
Account Name  
Password  
This function is used to specify the account name used to log  
in to the POP3 server. (Up to 64 characters)  
This function is used to specify the password associated with  
the account name used to log in to the POP3 server. (Up to 32  
characters)  
Auto Reception  
Reply Address  
This function is used to specify the time interval (between 1 and  
60 minutes) for checking e-mail when the Auto Reception  
function is enabled.  
This function is used to specify the return e-mail address for  
error messages. If an error occurs, an error message will be  
sent to the e-mail address specified here. Normally, the reply  
address is set to the e-mail address of the administrator. (Up to  
64 characters)  
Port Number  
This function is used to specify the port number for the POP3  
server. Normally, port number 110 is used. (1 to 65535)  
POP3 Server Timeout  
This function is used to specify the length of time (30 to 300  
seconds) until the connection to the POP3 server times out.  
9-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
FTP & DNS Configuration  
FTP Configuration  
Function  
Description  
FTP Proxy Server Address This function is used to specify the IP address for the proxy  
server used to access an FTP server.  
Remote Port Number of  
Proxy  
This function is used to specify the port number for the proxy  
server. (1 to 65535)  
FTP Server Timeout  
This function is used to specify the length of time (5 to 300  
seconds) until the connection to the FTP server times out.  
DNS Configuration  
Function  
Description  
Enable DNS Server  
This function is used to enable the use of a DNS server to  
resolve addresses.  
DNS Server Address  
This function is used to specify the IP address of the DNS  
server when “Enable DNS Server” is selected.  
9-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
“Fax” Tab  
Fax Configuration  
E-mail Setting  
Function  
Description  
Text Insert  
This function is used to specify whether or not text explaining  
that an image has been attached to the e-mail message is  
inserted when scan data is sent as an e-mail attachment.  
Header Print  
This function is used to specify whether or not to print header  
information when printing e-mail messages that have been  
received.  
9-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
“Scan” Tab  
File Destination Setting  
1 Click a number in the File Destination List that does not contain a file  
destination.  
9-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
2 Enter the necessary information in the screen that appears.  
9
1
2
3
4
5
File Destination  
Function  
Description  
Destination Name  
This function is used to specify the name for the file destination.  
(Up to 20 characters)  
FTP Server Address  
Directory  
This function is used to specify the host name or IP address of  
the FTP site where the scan data will be sent. (Up to 64  
characters)  
This function is used to specify the file path of the directory on  
the FTP site where the scan data will be stored. (Up to 128  
characters)  
Use Proxy  
This function is used to specify whether or not to access the  
FTP site via a proxy server. (For information on proxy server  
settings, refer to “FTP & DNS Configuration” on page 9-36.)  
9-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
Function  
Description  
Remote Port Number  
This function is used to specify the remote port number (1 to  
65535) if a proxy server is not being used. Normally, port  
number 21 is used.  
E-Mail Notification  
Function  
Description  
Enable Notification  
This function is used to specify whether or not to send an e-mail  
notification when scan data is uploaded to an FTP server.  
Notification Address  
This function is used to specify the e-mail addresses (up to 10)  
where e-mail notifications should be sent. (Up to 64 characters)  
Account Information  
Function  
Description  
Anonymous  
This function should be selected if the FTP site is an  
anonymous FTP server.  
Private Site  
If the FTP site requires user authentification, specify settings  
for the following.  
User Name: The user name (up to 20 characters) used to log  
in to the FTP site.  
Password: The password (up to 20 characters) associated with  
the user name used to log in to the FTP site.  
Confirm: Used to specify the password for confirmation.  
9-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
9.2.3 Adding Destinations  
Destinations can be added using the control panel of the copier or using  
PageScope Light.  
E-mail Address Location Control Panel  
PageScope Light  
2: Can be added; -: Cannot be added  
One-touch dial key  
Speed dial number  
Group dial key  
2
2
2
-
2
2
2
2
Speed dial number  
(with FTP server  
addresses added)  
9-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
9.2.3.1 Using the Control Panel To Add Addresses  
Specifying the Settings for a One-Touch Dial Key  
1 Press the [Utility] key.  
2 Press the  
key until “FAX  
REGISTRATION” appears.  
3 Press the [1] key on the 10-key pad  
to select “ONE-TOUCH DIAL”.  
4 Press the one-touch dial key where  
you wish to add an address, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
5 Enter the recipient name.  
H
For information on entering text, refer to “Entering Text” on  
page 3-18.  
H
Up to 20 characters can be  
entered for the recipient name.  
6 Press the [Yes] key.  
7 Enter the e-mail address of the  
recipient.  
H
For information on entering text,  
refer to “Entering Text” on page 3-18.  
H
H
Up to 64 characters can be entered for the e-mail address.  
If only numbers are entered for the address, it will be regarded as  
a fax number.  
8 Press the [Yes] key.  
H
The [Yes] key cannot be pressed if the e-mail address does not  
contain “@”.  
H
The settings are registered. To add information for other one-touch  
dial keys, repeat steps 4 through 8.  
9-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
9 Press the [No] key when you have  
finished adding addresses.  
The FAX REGISTRATION screen  
appears again.  
Specifying the Settings for a Speed Dial Number  
1 Press the [Utility] key.  
2 Press the  
key until “FAX  
REGISTRATION” appears.  
3 Press the [2] key on the 10-key pad  
to select “SPEED DIAL”.  
4 Use the 10-key pad to enter the 3-  
digit speed dial number where you  
wish to add an address. (Example:  
011)  
5 Enter the recipient name.  
H
For information on entering text,  
refer to “Entering Text” on  
page 3-18.  
H
Up to 20 characters can be entered for the recipient name.  
6 Press the [Yes] key.  
7 Enter the e-mail address of the  
recipient.  
H
For information on entering text,  
refer to “Entering Text” on page 3-18.  
H
H
Up to 64 characters can be entered for the e-mail address.  
If only numbers are entered for the address, it will be regarded as  
a fax number.  
8 Press the [Yes] key.  
H
The [Yes] key cannot be pressed if the e-mail address does not  
contain “@”.  
H
The settings are registered. To add information for other speed dial  
numbers, repeat steps 4 through 8.  
9-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
9 Press the [No] key when you have  
finished adding addresses.  
The FAX REGISTRATION screen  
appears again.  
Specifying the Settings for a Group Dial Key  
1 Press the [Utility] key.  
2 Press the  
key until “FAX  
REGISTRATION” appears.  
3 Press the [3] key on the 10-key pad  
to select “GROUP DIAL”.  
4 Press the one-touch dial key where  
you wish to add a group dial setting.  
5 Press the  
and  
keys to  
select a GROUP DIAL number, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
6 Enter a group name, and then press  
the [Yes] key.  
H
H
For information on entering text,  
refer to “Entering Text” on page 3-18.  
Up to 20 characters can be entered for the group name.  
7 Use the one-touch dial keys and  
speed dial numbers to enter the  
address for the recipient.  
Tip  
To delete the currently displayed destination, press the [No] key, and  
then select a new recipient.  
8 Select the next destination, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
H
Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all of  
9-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
the destinations have been specified.  
H
H
Up to 50 destinations can be specified for one group dial key.  
In this case, the numbers of destinations specified for the one-  
touch (group dial) key are added to the current group dial setting.  
9 Press the [Start] key when you have  
finished adding addresses.  
H
The settings are registered. To  
add information for other group dial keys, repeat steps 4 through 8.  
10 Press the [No] key when you have  
finished adding addresses.  
The FAX REGISTRATION screen  
appears again.  
9-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
9.2.3.2 Using PageScope Light To Add Addresses  
Specifying Settings for One-Touch Dialing  
From the page displayed by clicking “One-Touch Dial Setting” in the menu  
on the “Fax” tab, one-touch dial settings for the copier can be specified.  
4
1
2
3
5
1
2
3
No.  
One-touch dial number (01 to 64)  
Name  
The name of the destination for the one-touch dial setting.  
Destination address  
The address programmed for the one-touch dial setting.  
Depending on the type of destination, this address can be  
a fax number or an e-mail address.  
4
5
Timer Transmission  
[Delete] button  
The send time is displayed for one-touch dial settings  
specified for time transmission.  
Click this button to delete the selected one-touch dial  
setting.  
9-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
Adding a New One-Touch Dial Setting  
1 Start up PageScope Light.  
Refer to “Using PageScope Light” on page 9-10.  
H
2 Log in to the Administrator mode.  
3 Click “One-Touch Dial Setting” in the menu on the “Fax” tab.  
4 Click the one-touch dial number where you wish to add a new address.  
The One-Touch Registration screen appears.  
5 Select “E-mail” from the drop-down list, and then click the [Apply]  
button .  
6 Enter the destination name and e-mail address below “E-mail  
Destination”, and then click the [Apply] button.  
9-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
Specifying the Settings for Speed Dialing  
From the page displayed by clicking “Speed Dial Setting” in the menu on  
the “Fax” tab, speed dial settings for the copier can be specified.  
1
2
3
4
5
1
Index  
No.  
Click an index number to jump to the corresponding speed  
dial list.  
2
3
Speed dial number (001 to 200)  
Destination Name  
The destination programmed with the selected speed dial  
number  
4
Destination address  
The destination address programmed with the selected  
speed dial number  
Depending on the type of destination, this address can be  
a fax number or an e-mail address.  
5
[Delete] button  
Click this button to delete the selected speed dial setting.  
9-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
Adding a New Speed Dial Setting  
1 Start up PageScope Light.  
Refer to “Using PageScope Light” on page 9-10.  
H
2 Log in to the Administrator mode.  
3 Click “Speed Dial Setting” in the menu on the “Fax” tab.  
4 Click the speed dial number where you wish to add a new address.  
The Speed Dial Registration screen appears.  
5 Select “E-mail” from the drop-down list, and then click the [Apply]  
button.  
6 Enter the destination name and e-mail address below “E-mail  
Destination”, and then click the [Apply] button.  
9-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
Specifying the Settings for Group Dialing  
From the page displayed by clicking “Group Dial Setting” in the menu on  
the “Fax” tab, group dial settings for the copier can be specified.  
3
4
1
2
1
2
No.  
One-touch dial number (01 to 64)  
Destination Name  
The group name is displayed for the one-touch dial keys  
that contain groups.  
3
4
Address  
“(Group Dial)” is displayed for the one-touch dial keys that  
contain groups.  
[Delete] button  
Click this button to delete the one-touch dial settings that  
contain group dial information.  
Adding a New Group Dial Setting  
1 Start up PageScope Light.  
H
Refer to “Using PageScope Light” on page 9-10.  
2 Log in to the Administrator mode.  
3 Click “Group Dial Setting” in the menu on the “Fax” tab.  
4 Click the group dial number where you wish to add a new address.  
9-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
5 The Group Dial Registration screen appears. Destinations that have  
already been specified for one-touch dialing or speed dialing can be  
added to the 50 destinations specified for a group dial key. To select  
a destination, select the check box to the left of the destination in the  
list.  
6 Click the [Apply] button.  
1
3
2
1
2
3
Group Dial Name  
One-Touch Dial Index  
Speed Dial Index  
This function is used to specify the name for the group dial  
setting. (Up to 20 characters)  
Click an index number to jump to the corresponding one-  
touch dial list.  
Click an index number to jump to the corresponding speed  
dial list.  
9-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
Specifying the Settings for Speed Dialing (FTP Server)  
From the page displayed by clicking “File Destination Setting” in the menu  
on the “Scan” tab, FTP servers can be specified for speed dial numbers  
on the copier.  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
No.  
Speed dial number (201 to 210)  
FTP server name  
Destination Name  
Address  
FTP server address  
[Delete] button  
Click this button to delete the selected speed dial setting.  
9-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
Adding a New Speed Dial (FTP Server) Setting  
1 Start up PageScope Light.  
Refer to “Using PageScope Light” on page 9-10.  
H
2 Log in to the Administrator mode.  
3 Click “File Destination Setting” in the menu on the “Scan” tab.  
4 Click the speed dial number where you wish to add a new address.  
5 The File Destination screen appears. Enter the necessary information,  
and then click the [Apply] button.  
1
2
3
4
5
9-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
File Destination  
Function  
Description  
Destination Name  
This function is used to specify the name for the file destination.  
(Up to 20 characters)  
FTP Server Address  
Directory  
This function is used to specify the host name or IP address of  
the FTP site where the scan data will be sent. (Up to 64  
characters)  
This function is used to specify the file path of the directory on  
the FTP site where the scan data will be stored. (Up to 128  
characters)  
Use Proxy  
This function is used to specify whether or not to access the  
FTP site via a proxy server. (For information on proxy server  
settings, refer to “FTP & DNS Configuration” on page 9-36.)  
Remote Port Number  
This function is used to specify the remote port number (1 to  
65535) if a proxy server is not being used. Normally, port  
number 21 is used.  
E-Mail Notification  
Function  
Description  
Enable Notification  
This function is used to specify whether or not to send an e-mail  
notification when scan data is uploaded to an FTP server.  
Notification Address  
This function is used to specify the e-mail addresses (up to 10)  
where e-mail notifications should be sent. (Up to 64 characters)  
Account Information  
Function  
Description  
Anonymous  
This function should be selected if the FTP site is an  
anonymous FTP server.  
Private Site  
If the FTP site requires user authentification, specify settings  
for the following.  
User Name: The user name (up to 20 characters) used to log  
in to the FTP site  
Password: The password (up to 20 characters) associated with  
the user name used to log in to the FTP site  
Confirm: Used to specify the password for confirmation  
9-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Getting Ready  
9
Downloading and Uploading the Destination List  
From the page displayed by clicking “Downloading/Uploading Destination  
list” in the menu on the “Fax” tab, you can export to a txt file the one-touch  
dial and speed dial settings for destinations (except FTP server  
destinations) registered on the copier (download). You can also upload a  
txt file to the copier.  
2
3
1
1
2
3
[Apply] button  
[Browse] button  
[Apply] button  
Click this button to export to a txt file the list of destinations  
programmed with one-touch dial keys and speed dial  
numbers. (A file download window opens.)  
Click this button to select a txt file containing destinations  
programmed with one-touch dial keys and speed dial  
numbers.  
Click this button to upload the selected txt file containing  
one-touch dial key and speed dial number settings to the  
copier.  
9-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.3 Using Scan to E-mail Operations  
9
9.3  
Using Scan to E-mail Operations  
Tip  
With a Scan to E-mail operation, documents are sent via a mail server.  
They are not sent directly to the recipient. In addition, images are  
regarded as having been sent successfully on completion of their  
transmission to the server.  
In order to perform this operation, an IP address, SMTP server, and e-  
mail address must have already been specified.  
To cancel a job while the document is being scanned, press the [Stop]  
key.  
If the job could not be sent, the transmission result report is printed.  
To delete a job after it has been scanned, but is still in the queue,  
waiting to be sent, press the [Function] key, and then select “CANCEL  
RESERV.”. (Refer to “Canceling (Deleting) a Document Queued in the  
Memory for Transmission” on page 6-20.)  
9-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.3 Using Scan to E-mail Operations  
9
9.3.1 Transmission Procedures  
9.3.1.1 Starting to Scan  
1 Press the [Scan] key.  
The copier switches to Scan mode,  
and the Scan screen appears.  
2 Place the document to be scanned  
in the auto document feeder.  
H
H
Adjust the guides to the size of  
the document.  
Load the document with the  
surface to be scanned face up.  
3 Press the [123/ABC] key.  
4 Press the keys on the 10-key pad to  
enter the e-mail address, and then  
press the [Yes] key. The e-mail  
address can also be specified using  
one of the following methods.  
H
“Specifying the Destination Using One-Touch Dial Keys” on  
page 9-63.  
H
“Specifying the Destination Using Speed Dial Numbers” on  
page 9-64.  
H
H
“Specifying the Destination Using the Phone Book” on page 9-66.  
To skip specifying the subject line, resolution, etc., press the [Start]  
key, instead of the [Yes] key.  
9-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.3 Using Scan to E-mail Operations  
9
H
If settings such as the subject, cc recipient, and resolution are not  
to be specified, press the [Start] key instead of the [Yes] key, and  
skip to step 10.  
5 Enter a title (subject), and then  
press the [Yes] key.  
6 Enter the e-mail address for any  
additional recipient, and then press  
the [Yes] key.  
H
To specify more then one CC address, press the [Yes] key to enter  
the additional addresses. Repeat step 6 until all of the recipients  
have been specified.  
7 After you have finished specifying  
the addresses for additional  
recipients, press the [Yes] key.  
8 Press the  
and  
keys to select  
the color mode (“COLOR” or “B/W”),  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
9 Press the  
and  
keys to select  
the resolution (150× 150 dpi,  
300× 300 dpi, or 600× 600 dpi), and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
H
The 600× 600 dpi resolution cannot be selected if “COLOR” was  
selected as the scan mode in step 8.  
H
H
To specify detailed settings for the scan mode, press the  
For information on specifying detailed settings, refer to “Changing  
the Scan Mode Settings” on page 9-59.  
key.  
10 Press the [Start] key.  
Scanning starts, and then the scan  
data is sent to the recipients.  
H
To change the size of the scanned image, press the  
key.  
H
For information on changing the size, refer to “Changing the  
Scanned Image Size” on page 9-60.  
9-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.3 Using Scan to E-mail Operations  
9
9.3.1.2 Changing the Scan Mode Settings  
The scan mode settings can be changed from the screen for selecting the  
resolution. If the settings are not changed, scan data will be sent using the  
default scan mode settings, or the initial settings.  
For more details, refer to “Specifying the Default Settings for the Scan  
Settings” on page 9-60.  
1 Press the  
and  
keys to select  
the color mode, and then press the  
[Yes] key.  
2 Press the  
and  
keys to select  
the resolution (150× 150 dpi,  
300× 300 dpi, or 600× 600 dpi), and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
H
The 600× 600 dpi resolution cannot be selected if “COLOR” was  
selected as the scan mode in step 1.  
H
To specify detailed settings for the scan mode, press the  
key.  
3 Press the  
and keys to select  
the data format (“TIFF” or “PDF”) for  
e-mail attachments.  
4 To change other settings, press the  
key. (Go to Step 5.)  
H
To quit making changes to the scan mode settings, press the  
[Start] key. The screen for selecting the document mode appears.  
If “COLOR” was selected for the color mode in step 1, press the  
[Start] key.  
H
5 Press the [Auto/Photo] key, to  
select “[A]”(auto), “PHOTO”, or  
“TEXT”.  
H
The current setting appears on  
the left side of the display.  
6 If “PHOTO” or “TEXT” was selected,  
press the and keys to adjust  
the density level.  
9-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.3 Using Scan to E-mail Operations  
9
7 To change other settings, press the  
key. (Go to Step 8.)  
H
To quit making changes to the scan mode settings, press the  
[Start] key. The screen for selecting the document mode appears.  
8 Press the  
and  
keys to select  
the compression encoding method  
(“MH”, “MR”, or “MMR”).  
9 Press the [Start] key to return to the Scan screen.  
The document mode selection screen appears.  
9.3.1.3 Changing the Scanned Image Size  
The setting for the size of the scan image can be changed from the screen  
for selecting the document mode.  
1 Press the  
key in the screen for  
selecting the SCAN SIZE.  
2 Press the  
and  
keys to select  
the scan size, and then press the  
[Yes] key.  
The document mode selection screen appears again.  
9.3.1.4 Specifying the Default Settings for the Scan Settings  
The default settings for resolution, data format, and encoding method  
used by the Scan to E-mail and Scan to Server (FTP) functions can be  
specified.  
Specifying the Resolution  
1 Press the [Utility] key.  
2 Press the  
or  
key until  
“SCAN SETTING” appears.  
3 Press the [1] key on the 10-key pad  
to select “RESOLUTION”.  
4 Press the  
and  
keys to select  
the resolution (150× 150 dpi,  
300× 300 dpi, or 600× 600 dpi), and  
9-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.3 Using Scan to E-mail Operations  
then press the [Yes] key.  
9
The SCAN SETTING screen appears.  
Specifying the Data Format  
1 Press the [Utility] key.  
2 Press the  
or  
key until  
“SCAN SETTING” appears.  
3 Press the [2] key on the 10-key pad  
to select “IMAGE FORMAT”.  
4 Press the  
and  
keys to select  
the data format (“TIFF” or “PDF”),  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
The SCAN SETTING screen appears.  
Specifying the Encoding Method  
1 Press the [Utility] key.  
2 Press the  
or  
key until  
“SCAN SETTING” appears.  
3 Press the [3] key on the 10-key pad  
to select “CODING METHOD”.  
4 Press the  
and  
keys to select  
the compression encoding method  
(“MH”, “MR”, or “MMR”), and then  
press the [Yes] key.  
The SCAN SETTING screen appears.  
9-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.3 Using Scan to E-mail Operations  
9
9.3.1.5 If Memory Becomes Full While Scanning  
A warning message will appear if the amount of free memory in the copier  
becomes low while scanning a document.  
Approximately two seconds later  
If the [Start] key is pressed within one minute of the message appearing,  
the scan data for the pages that have already been scanned is sent. If the  
auto document feeder is being used, the remaining pages in the document  
will be scanned after the scan data has been sent.  
If the [Yes] key is pressed within one minute of this message appearing,  
or if no key is pressed, the job will be canceled.  
9-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.3 Using Scan to E-mail Operations  
9
9.3.2 Specifying the Destination Using One-Touch Dial Keys  
Note  
The one-touch dial setting must have already been specified.  
For information on setting up one-touch dial keys, refer to “Adding  
Destinations” on page 9-41.  
1 Press the one-touch dial key  
08/40  
16/48  
24/56  
32/64  
01/33  
09/41  
17/49  
25/57  
02/34  
10/42  
18/50  
26/58  
03/35  
11/43  
19/51  
27/59  
04/36  
12/44  
20/52  
28/60  
05/37  
13/45  
21/53  
29/61  
06/38  
14/46  
22/54  
30/62  
07/39  
15/47  
23/55  
31/63  
([01]to[64]) programmedwith  
the e-mail address where you  
want to send the scan data.  
9-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.3 Using Scan to E-mail Operations  
9
9.3.3 Specifying the Destination Using Speed Dial Numbers  
Note  
The speed dial setting must have already been specified.  
For information on setting up speed dial numbers, refer to “Adding  
Destinations” on page 9-41.  
1 Press the [Speed Dial] key, and  
then use the 10-key pad to enter the  
3-digit speed dial number  
programmed with the e-mail  
address where you want to send the  
scan data.  
H
If you make a mistake, press the  
[No] key, and then enter the  
correct number.  
9-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.3 Using Scan to E-mail Operations  
9
9.3.4 Specifying the Destination Using Group Dial Keys  
Note  
The group dial setting must have already been specified.  
For information on setting up group dial keys, refer to “Adding  
Destinations” on page 9-41.  
If at least one fax number is registered as a recipient with a group dial  
key, that group dial key cannot be used with the Scan to E-mail  
transmission. In this case, the message “NOT E-MAIL ADDRESS”  
appears in the display.  
1 Press the one-touch dial key  
08/40  
16/48  
24/56  
32/64  
01/33  
09/41  
17/49  
25/57  
02/34  
10/42  
18/50  
26/58  
03/35  
11/43  
19/51  
27/59  
04/36  
12/44  
20/52  
28/60  
05/37  
13/45  
21/53  
29/61  
06/38  
14/46  
22/54  
30/62  
07/39  
15/47  
23/55  
31/63  
([01]to[64]) programmedwith  
the group where you want to  
send the scan data.  
9-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.3 Using Scan to E-mail Operations  
9
9.3.5 Specifying the Destination Using the Phone Book  
The phone book contains all programmed one-touch dialing and speed  
dialing numbers, allowing you to search for and select the recipient that  
you wish to send a document to.  
1 Press the [Phone Book] key.  
2 Press the  
and  
keys to select  
“LIST” or “SEARCH”, and then  
press the [Yes] key.  
H
If “LIST” is selected, the detailed  
settings for the one-touch dial  
keys and speed dial numbers  
aredisplayed. Press the  
and  
keys to select a recipient.  
H
If “SEARCH” is selected, a  
screen for entering the  
characters to search for appears. This is used to enter part (or all)  
of a recipient’s name. For information on performing the search,  
refer to “To search the phone book” on page 5-10.  
3 Press the [Start] key.  
9-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.4 Using Scan to Server (FTP) Operations  
9
9.4  
Using Scan to Server (FTP) Operations  
Tip  
In order to perform this operation, an FTP server address must have  
already been specified. Use PageScope Light to specify the settings.  
(Refer to “File Destination Setting” on page 9-38.)  
A specified recipient can be notified by e-mail of the FTP server  
address where a file was uploaded. This setting can be specified using  
PageScope Light. (Refer to “File Destination Setting” on page 9-38.)  
To cancel a job while the document is being scanned, press the [Stop]  
key.  
If the job could not be sent, a transmission result report is printed.  
To delete a job after it has been scanned, but is still in the queue,  
waiting to be sent, press the [Function] key, and then select “CANCEL  
RESERV.”. (Refer to “Canceling (Deleting) a Document Queued in the  
Memory for Transmission” on page 6-20.)  
9-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.4 Using Scan to Server (FTP) Operations  
9
9.4.1 Procedure for Scanning to a Server  
9.4.1.1 Using the Auto Document Feeder  
1 Press the [Scan] key.  
The copier switches to Scan mode,  
and the scan screen appears.  
2 Place the document to be scanned  
in the auto document feeder.  
H
H
Adjust the guides to the size of  
the document.  
Load the document with the  
surface to be scanned face up.  
3 Press the [Speed Dial] key, and  
then use the 10-key pad to enter the  
3-digit speed dial number  
programmed with the FTP server  
address where you want to upload  
the scan data.  
H
Specify a speed dial number  
between “201” and “210”.  
H
An FTP server address can only  
be specified with a speed dial number. In addition, the FTP server  
addresses are registered for a speed dial number using  
PageScope Light. For details, refer to “Specifying the Settings for  
Speed Dialing” on page 9-48.  
H
H
If you make a mistake, press the [No] key, and then enter the  
correct number.  
If there is no address registered for the specified speed dial  
number, an error message appears. Enter a correct speed dial  
number.  
4 Press the [Yes] key.  
To skip specifying the image  
H
resolution, press the [Start] key  
instead of the [Yes] key.  
9-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.4 Using Scan to Server (FTP) Operations  
9
5 Press the  
and  
keys to select  
the color mode (“COLOR” or “B/W”),  
and then press the [Yes] key.  
6 Press the  
and  
keys to select  
the resolution (150× 150 dpi,  
300× 300 dpi, or 600× 600 dpi), and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
H
The 600× 600 dpi resolution cannot be selected if “COLOR” was  
selected as the scan mode in step 5.  
H
H
To specify detailed settings for the scan mode, press the  
For information on specifying detailed settings, refer to “Changing  
key.  
the Scan Mode Settings” on page 9-59.  
7 Press the [Start] key.  
Scanning starts, then the scan data  
is sent to the recipients.  
H
To change the size of the scanned image, press the  
key.  
H
For information on changing the size, refer to “Changing the  
Scanned Image Size” on page 9-60.  
Tip  
Up to 10 specified recipients can be notified by e-mail of the FTP  
server address where a file was uploaded. When using  
PageScope Light to register the speed dial information, select  
“Enable Notification”. (Refer to “Adding a New Speed Dial (FTP  
Server) Setting” on page 9-53.)  
9-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.4 Using Scan to Server (FTP) Operations  
9
9.4.1.2 If Memory Becomes Full While Scanning  
A warning message will appear if the amount of free memory in the copier  
becomes low while scanning a document.  
Approximately two seconds later  
If the [Start] key is pressed within one minute of the message appearing,  
the scan data for the pages that have already been scanned is sent. If the  
auto document feeder is being used, the remaining pages in the document  
will be scanned after the scan data has been sent.  
If the [Yes] key is pressed within one minute of this message appearing,  
or if no key is pressed, the job will be canceled.  
9-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.5 Using Internet Faxing Operations  
9
9.5  
Using Internet Faxing Operations  
Tip  
Internet faxes are sent and received via a mail server. They are not  
sent directly to the recipient. In addition, images are regarded as  
having been sent successfully on completion of their transmission to  
the server.  
The size of original that can be sent and the image quality varies  
depending on the type of Internet fax at the receiving end. Be sure to  
check the capabilities of the Internet fax device at the receiving end  
before sending an Internet fax. If the capabilities of the Internet fax  
device at the receiving end are unknown, send the fax as Letter size  
(inch models) or A4 size (metric models) and at standard resolution.  
In order to use Internet faxing, an IP address, SMTP server, and e-mail  
address must have already been specified.  
To cancel a job while the document is being scanned, press the [Stop]  
key.  
If the job could not be sent, a transmission result report is printed.  
To delete a job after it has been scanned, but is still in the queue,  
waiting to be sent, press the [Function] key, and then select “CANCEL  
RESERV.”. (Refer to “Canceling (Deleting) a Document Queued in the  
Memory for Transmission” on page 6-20.)  
9-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.5 Using Internet Faxing Operations  
9
9.5.1 Procedure for Sending Internet Faxes  
9.5.1.1 Starting to Scan  
1 Press the [Fax] key.  
The copier switches to Fax mode,  
and the fax screen appears.  
2 Place the document to be scanned  
in the auto document feeder.  
H
H
Adjust the guides to the size of  
the document.  
Load the document with the  
surface to be scanned face up.  
3 If necessary, adjust the fax resolution setting (p. 5-12).  
4 Press the [123/ABC] key.  
5 Using the 10-key pad, enter the e-  
mail address of the recipient. The e-  
mail address can also be specified  
using one of the following methods.  
H
H
H
“Specifying the Destination Using One-Touch Dial Keys” on  
page 9-63.  
“Specifying the Destination Using Speed Dial Numbers” on  
page 9-64.  
“Specifying the Destination Using the Phone Book” on page 9-66.  
9-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.5 Using Internet Faxing Operations  
9
H
For information on entering text, refer to “Entering Text” on  
page 3-18.  
6 Press the [Start] key. Scanning starts, and the scan data is sent to the  
recipient.  
9.5.1.2 If Memory Becomes Full While Scanning  
A warning message will appear if the amount of free memory in the copier  
becomes low while scanning a document.  
Approximately two seconds later  
If the [Start] key is pressed within one minute of the message appearing,  
the scan data for the pages that have already been scanned is sent. If the  
auto document feeder is being used, the remaining pages in the document  
will be scanned after the scan data has been sent.  
If the [Yes] key is pressed within one minute of this message appearing,  
or if no key is pressed, the job will be canceled.  
9-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.5 Using Internet Faxing Operations  
9
9.5.2 Specifying the Destination Using Programmed Dialing  
The only transmission functions that can be used when an e-mail address  
is selected are broadcast transmission and timer transmission.  
9-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.5 Using Internet Faxing Operations  
9
9.5.3 Sending a Document to Multiple Destinations  
(Broadcast Transmission)  
The same scan data can be sent to multiple destinations.  
The maximum number of destinations that can be specified at one time is  
274.  
Note  
For information on using broadcast transmission, refer to “To fax using  
broadcast transmission” on page 6-7.  
9-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.5 Using Internet Faxing Operations  
9
9.5.4 Sending a Document at a Specified Time (Timer  
Transmission)  
A document can be scanned and stored in the copier’s memory, then sent  
at a specified time.  
Note  
For information on using timer transmission, refer to “To fax using  
timer transmission” on page 6-11.  
9-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.5 Using Internet Faxing Operations  
9
9.5.5 Canceling (Deleting) a Document Queued for Timer  
Transmission  
Of the e-mail messages stored in the copier’s memory and reserved for  
timer transmission, a specific e-mail message can be selected and  
deleted.  
Note  
For information on canceling a queued document, refer to “Canceling  
(Deleting) a Document Queued in the Memory for Transmission” on  
page 6-20.  
9-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.5 Using Internet Faxing Operations  
9
9.5.6 Receiving Internet Faxes  
9.5.6.1 Types of E-mail Messages That Can Be Received  
The copier can receive the following types of e-mail messages.  
G
G
G
Body text of an e-mail message (single-byte characters only)  
TIFF-F images  
Body text of an e-mail message (single-byte characters only) and  
TIFF-F images  
G
Text files sent as attachments (single-byte characters only)  
Note  
E-mail messages cannot be received if the IP address or POP3 server  
address have not been specified. In addition, a transmission error will  
occur if the POP3 account or POP3 password have not been specified  
correctly. Refer to “Specifying Other E-mail Settings (“E-MAIL  
SETTING 2” Menu)” on page 9-28.  
If the body of an e-mail message contains HTML codes, it cannot be  
printed.  
E-mail messages cannot be received if they contain an attachment of  
a format specific to a certain application.  
If the e-mail message that arrives contains an attachment in a format  
that cannot be received, a result notification is sent to the  
administrator. Refer to “Specifying the Address for Result  
Notifications” on page 9-32.  
9.5.6.2 Auto Reception  
If the copier is set to periodically check the POP3 server, Internet faxes  
can be automatically received. Refer to “Setting Up Auto Reception” on  
page 9-31.  
If the copier is not set to automatically retrieve messages, e-mail must be  
checked manually. Refer to “Manual Reception” on page 9-79.  
9-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.5 Using Internet Faxing Operations  
<Screen during auto reception>  
9
9.5.6.3 Manual Reception  
If the copier is not set to automatically retrieve messages, or you want to  
check for messages immediately, e-mail can be checked manually.  
Checking E-mail Manually  
1 Press the [Fax] key. The copier  
switches to Fax mode, and the fax  
screen appears.  
2 Press the [Function] key.  
3 Press the [0] key on the 10-key pad.  
Alternatively, press the [Function]  
key 9 times to select “INTERNET  
FAX RX”, and then press the [Yes]  
key.  
9-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.5 Using Internet Faxing Operations  
9
4 Press the [Yes] key. The copier  
checks the POP3 server for  
received e-mail messages, then  
begins to print any messages that  
have been received. After checking for received e-mail messages and  
printing them, the fax screen appears again.  
9-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.5 Using Internet Faxing Operations  
9
9.5.7 Forwarding Fax Documents  
Fax messages received by the copier can be forwarded to another fax  
machine (fax number) or to an Internet fax service (e-mail address).  
Note  
When forwarding a document that has been received by Internet fax,  
some limitations may apply, depending on the data format of the  
image or the type of destination.  
Received Document  
Destination  
Forwarding Possible  
2: Possible;  
: Conditionally possible; -: Cannot be sent  
Fax  
Fax no.  
2
*
E-mail address  
Fax no.  
Internet fax  
-
E-mail address  
*
*
Documents can be forwarded if they meet the following criteria.  
Document size: Letter size (inch models), A4 size (metric models) or smaller  
Resolution: Standard or Fine  
Encoding method: MH  
9.5.7.1 Using the Forwarding Function  
1 Press the [Utility] key.  
2 Press the  
key until “RX  
OPERATION” appears.  
3 Press the [6] key on the 10-key pad  
to select “FORWARD”.  
4 Press the  
and  
keys to select  
“ON”, “ON (PRINT)”, or “OFF”, and  
then press the [Yes] key.  
H
If “ON” or “ON (PRINT)” are selected, the screen for specifying the  
forwarding destination appears. (Go to Step 5.)  
H
If “OFF” is selected, the RX OPERATION screen appears again.  
9-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.5 Using Internet Faxing Operations  
9
Tip  
If the option to forward and print the document (“ON (PRINT)”) is  
selected, the received fax is forwarded to a destination after  
printed the received data.  
5 The destination e-mail address or fax number can be entered using  
the 10-Key pad, the one-touch dial keys, or speed dial numbers.  
6 Press the [Yes] key.  
The RX OPERATION screen appears.  
9-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.6 Checking the Transmission/Reception Results  
9
9.6  
Checking the Transmission/Reception Results  
The transmission results for up to 60 messages, including sent and  
received faxes, are recorded.  
The copier is set to automatically print the activity report each time there  
have been 60 transmissions. In addition, the transmission result report  
can be printed by pressing the [Status] key.  
9-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.6 Checking the Transmission/Reception Results  
9
9.6.1 Checking the Transmission Results  
1 Press the [Status] key.  
2 Press the  
key once to select  
“TX/RX RESULT”, and then press  
the [Yes] key.  
3 Press the  
and  
keys to  
display and check the desired  
transmission results.  
H
In the transmission results  
screen, “TX” indicates result for  
sent messages, “RX” indicates  
results for received messages.  
H
H
If the [No] key is pressed twice  
while the transmission result are being displayed, the main screen  
appears.  
Press the [Start] key to print the transmission results report. After  
the transmission result report has been printed, the main screen  
appears.  
9-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Miscella-  
neous  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.1 Specifications  
10  
10.1 Specifications  
Specification  
Type  
FAX2900  
FAX3900  
Desktop  
OPC  
Photoconductor  
Printing System  
Fusing System  
Copy Resolution  
Electrostatic Dry Powdered Image Transfer to Plain Paper  
Heated Roller  
Horizontal: 600 dpi  
Vertical: 600 dpt  
Types of Original  
Kinds of Paper  
Types: Sheets  
Size: Maximum Legal L  
Plain paper, recycled paper (16 lb to 24 lb)  
Exclusive paper: card (24-1/4 lb to 43-1/4 lb)  
OHP transparencies, envelopes  
Print Paper Size  
Capacity  
<Tray1/Bypass Tray>  
A4 L, B5 L, A5 L, 16K L, Legal L, Letter L, Invoice L, FLS (13 × 8-1/4)  
Custom size: Width: 4-1/4 to 8-1/2, Length: 5-3/4 to 14  
<Tray1>  
Plain paper, recycled paper: 250 sheets (20 lb)  
Exclusive paper: cards; 5 sheets,  
OHP transparencies; 5 sheets, envelopes; 1 sheet  
<Bypass Tray>  
Plain paper, recycled paper: 10 sheets (20 lb)  
Exclusive paper: cards; 1 sheet, OHP transparencies; 1 sheet,  
envelopes; 1 sheet  
Warm-up Time  
Zoom Ratios  
Less than 25 seconds at room temperature (73.4°F)  
Full size: × 1.000  
Enlargement ratios: × 1.29, × 1.54 and × 2.00  
Reduction ratios: × 0.50, × 0.64 and × 0.78  
Zoom ratios: × 0.50 to × 2.00 (in × 0.01 increments)  
Multiple Copies  
Density Control  
Lost Image  
1 to 99 sheets  
Auto Text mode, Text mode, and Photo mode  
Leading edge: 1/4; Trailing edge: 1/4;  
Rear edge: 1/4; Front edge: 1/4  
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.1 Specifications  
10  
Specification  
FAX2900  
FAX3900  
Power Requirements  
110-127 V: less than 7A, 50-60 Hz  
220-240 V: less than 3.7 A, 50/60 Hz  
Power Consumption  
Dimensions  
120-127 V: 770-890W  
220-240 V: 814-888W  
416mm (width) × 419mm (depth) × 408mm (height)  
( 16.4inch (width) × 16.5inch (depth) × 16.1inch (height) )  
Standard Memory  
Weight  
Copier function: 16 MB  
Fax function: 6 MB  
Approx. 29 lb  
Scan to E-mail / Scan to Server  
Specification  
FAX3900  
Communications Protocols  
E-mail Transmission: SMTP, TCP/IP  
FTP Transmission: FTP, TCP/IP  
Resolution  
150 × 150 dpi, 300 × 300 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi  
Data Formats  
E-Mail Format: MIME  
Attached File Format: TIFF, PDF  
Cording Method  
Network  
MH, MR, MMR, JPEG (For Color mode, fixed at JPEG)  
Ethernet LAN (10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX connection)  
Internet Fax  
Specification  
FAX3900  
Communications Protocols  
E-mail Transmission: SMTP, TCP/IP  
E-mail Reception: POP3, TCP/IP  
Resolution  
Transmission: 204 × 98 dpi, 204 × 196 dpi  
Reception: 204 × 98 dpi, 204 × 196 dpi, 204 ×× 392 dpi, 200 × 100  
dpi, 200 × 200 dpi  
Data Formats  
Coding Method  
Network  
E-Mail Format: MIME  
Attached File Format: TIFF-F  
Transmission: MH  
Reception: MH, MR, MMR, JBIG  
Ethernet LAN (10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX connection)  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.1 Specifications  
10  
Auto Document Feeder  
Specification  
FAX2900  
FAX3900  
Document Feeding System  
Kinds of Original  
Original Size  
Standard Mode: 1-sided original  
Plain paper: 13-1/4 lb to 32 lb  
A4 L, B5 L, A5 L, Legal L, Letter L, Invoice L  
Custom size:  
Width: 5-3/4 to 8-1/2, Length: 5 to 14  
Capacity of Document Feed  
Tray  
50~104g/m2 (13 ~ 28lb ): 30 pages (plain paper)  
60~80g/m2 ( 16 ~ 20lb ) : 50 pages (plain paper)  
10 pages for special paper  
Power Consumption  
30 W  
Paper Feed Cassette (option)  
Specification  
Kinds or Paper  
Paper Sizes  
Plain paper, recycled paper (16 lb to 24 lb)  
A4 L, Letter L  
capacity  
500 sheets (20 lb)  
Power Consumption  
Dimensions  
Less than 7 W  
401mm (width) × 615mm (depth) × 138mm (height)  
( 15.8inch (width) × 24.2inch (depth) × 5.4inch (height) )  
Weight  
8.8 lb  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.2 Function Menu Commands  
10  
10.2 Function Menu Commands  
Function Menu Commands  
Menu  
Settings  
1 BROADCAST  
2 TIMER TX  
Recipients  
Transmission time  
3 MAILBOX TX  
4 PRINT MAILBOX RX  
5 POLLING TX  
6 POLLING RX  
7 RELAY INITIATE  
8 CANCEL RESERV.  
Recipient, mailbox ID and password  
Mailbox ID  
SINGLE/MULTI, polling ID and password  
Caller, polling ID and password  
Recipient, Relay Box ID and password  
Select job  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.3 Care of the Machine  
10  
10.3 Care of the Machine  
Cleaning  
Turn off the machine before cleaning it.  
Housing Cover  
§
Wipe the surface of the housing  
cover with a soft cloth dampened  
with a mild household detergent.  
Control Panel  
§
Wipe the surface of the Control  
Panel clean with a soft, dry cloth.  
Note  
Incorrectly cleaning the Control  
Panel keys may damage them.  
Never use mild household  
detergent or glass cleaner to clean  
the Control Panel.  
10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.4 Glossary  
10  
10.4 Glossary  
Terms and Definitions  
Term  
Definition  
Automatic redialing  
If a call cannot be completed, for example if the recipient’s machine is  
busy, the recipient is automatically called again. If a document queued in  
the memory to be sent contains multiple pages, until the time for redialing  
has been reached, it is advanced in the queue and sent.  
F codes  
F codes are mailbox functions, such as “SUB” (sub-addresses), “SEP”  
(selective polling), “SID” and “PWD” (passwords), regulated by the G3  
standards of the ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union).  
Mailbox transmission/reception and relay initiation transmission are  
possible only with similar machines compatible with F code transmission.  
Internet fax  
Faxes can be transmitted via the Internet or an Intranet instead of  
through telephone lines.  
Instead of a fax number, the recipient’s e-mail address is specified and  
the scanned image (TIFF format) can be sent as an e-mail message to a  
computer or Internet fax. In addition, e-mail messages from computers  
can be received as images.  
General subscriber line  
JBIG coding method  
Analog telephone lines (public network)  
New method of data compression/decompression, standardized by the  
Joint Bi-level Image Expert Working Group, a subcommittee of the  
International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T). Effective for  
transferring large amounts of data or high-resolution image data such as  
halftones.  
Manual reception  
Manual transmission  
Memory  
Receiving a fax document after talking on the telephone.  
Sending a fax document after talking on the telephone.  
Stores fax and copy image data. By installing expansion memory, much  
more image data can be stored in the memory.  
Memory reception  
When paper runs out or a paper misfeed occurs while receiving a fax, the  
data is automatically stored in the memory and printed out later.  
Even if the paper runs out during the night or when the user is away, the  
fax document can still be received.  
Network scanner  
PBX  
This is a function that allows scanned images to be sent to a computer  
via a network. They can also be sent as e-mail messages or uploaded to  
FTP servers.  
Abbreviation for private branch exchange  
Exchange equipment installed in a company or a plant to connect a  
number of telephone sets with multiple station lines in order to enable  
unrestricted communications between the telephone sets.  
Protocols  
The necessary rules for communication  
Touch-tone signals  
A signal used on the telephone line; used when calling on a push-button  
line or using push-button services.  
By pressing the [ ] key in the 10-Key Pad, touch-tone signals are used,  
even if a dial phone line is connected.  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.5 Paper Size and Zoom Ratio Tables  
10  
10.5 Paper Size and Zoom Ratio Tables  
Paper Sizes  
Paper Format  
Metric Size  
Inch Size  
A4  
A5  
A6  
B4  
B5  
B6  
210 mm × 297 mm  
148 mm × 210 mm  
105 mm × 148 mm  
257 mm × 364 mm  
182 mm × 257 mm  
128 mm × 182 mm  
8-1/4 × 11-3/4  
5-3/4 × 8-1/4  
4-1/4 × 5-3/4  
10 × 14-1/4  
7-1/4 × 10  
5 × 7-1/4  
Paper Format  
Legal  
Inch Size  
8-1/2 × 14  
8-1/2 × 13  
8 × 13  
Metric Size  
216 mm × 356 mm  
216 mm × 330 mm  
203 mm × 330 mm  
220 mm × 330 mm  
210 mm × 330 mm  
210 mm × 301 mm  
216 mm × 279 mm  
203 mm × 267 mm  
203 mm × 254 mm  
140 mm × 216 mm  
102 mm × 152 mm  
Foolscap  
Foolscap  
Foolscap  
Foolscap  
8-1/4 × 11-3/4  
Letter  
Government Legal  
8-2/3 × 13  
8-1/4 × 13  
8-1/4 × 11-3/4  
8-1/2 × 11  
8 × 10-1/2  
8 × 10  
Folio  
Government Letter  
Quarto  
Statement  
4 × 6  
Invoice  
5-1/2 × 8-1/2  
4 × 6  
10-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.5 Paper Size and Zoom Ratio Tables  
10  
Zoom Ratios  
Metric Sizes  
Document Paper Size  
Desired Paper Size  
Zoom Ratio  
× 0.70  
× 0.50  
× 0.86  
× 0.61  
× 0.70  
× 0.86  
× 1.41  
× 1.22  
× 2.00  
× 1.41  
× 1.73  
× 1.22  
× 0.81  
× 0.57  
× 0.70  
× 1.64  
× 1.15  
× 1.41  
× 0.81  
× 1.64  
× 1.15  
× 2.00  
× 1.41  
A4  
A5  
A6  
B5  
B6  
A6  
B6  
A4  
B5  
A4  
A5  
B5  
B6  
A5  
A6  
B6  
A3  
A4  
B4  
A6  
A4  
A5  
B4  
B5  
210 mm × 297 mm  
8-1/4 × 11-3/4  
A5  
148 mm × 210 mm  
5-3/4 × 8-1/4  
A6  
105 mm × 148 mm  
4-1/4 × 5-3/4  
B5  
182 mm × 257 mm  
7-1/4 × 10  
B6  
128 mm × 182 mm  
5 × 7-1/4  
Inch Sizes  
Document Paper Size  
Desired Paper Size  
Foolscap  
Letter  
Zoom Ratio  
× 0.92  
Legal  
8-1/2 × 14  
215.9 mm × 355.6 mm  
× 0.78  
Invoice  
× 0.60  
Foolscap  
8-1/2 × 13  
215.9 mm × 330.2 mm  
Letter  
× 0.84  
Invoice  
× 0.64  
10-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.5 Paper Size and Zoom Ratio Tables  
10  
Letter  
8-1/2 × 11  
215.9 mm × 279.4 mm  
Invoice  
× 0.64  
Invoice  
5-1/2 × 8-1/2  
139.7 mm × 215.9 mm  
Legal  
× 1.54  
× 1.52  
× 1.29  
Foolscap  
Letter  
Zoom ratio = Paper size/Document size  
1 inch = 25.4 mm  
1 mm = 0.0394 inch  
10-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://konicaminolta.com  
Copyright  
1392-7701-01  
2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

MRV Communications Network Card EM316E3 User Manual
Multiquip Biscuit Joiner MVC88VTH User Manual
Nautique Boat 80128 User Manual
NetComm Network Router AM5066 User Manual
Newcon Optik Binoculars PHANTOM 20 User Manual
Omega Engineering Thermometer HH507R User Manual
One for All Universal Remote URC 7730 User Manual
Oricom Radio UHF080 User Manual
Panasonic Camcorder 456 User Manual
Panasonic CD Player CQ HR1003U User Manual